WO2019242773A1 - Communication method and communication device in multi-rat dual connectivity - Google Patents

Communication method and communication device in multi-rat dual connectivity Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019242773A1
WO2019242773A1 PCT/CN2019/092442 CN2019092442W WO2019242773A1 WO 2019242773 A1 WO2019242773 A1 WO 2019242773A1 CN 2019092442 W CN2019092442 W CN 2019092442W WO 2019242773 A1 WO2019242773 A1 WO 2019242773A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
bearer
pdcp
configuration information
length
entity
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/092442
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
彭文杰
李冠臣
熊新
戴明增
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201811302962.7A external-priority patent/CN110636640B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to BR112020026368-0A priority Critical patent/BR112020026368A2/en
Priority to EP23192120.6A priority patent/EP4297528A3/en
Priority to EP19823604.4A priority patent/EP3806534B1/en
Publication of WO2019242773A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019242773A1/en
Priority to US17/129,460 priority patent/US11895722B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • H04W28/065Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information using assembly or disassembly of packets
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/16Central resource management; Negotiation of resources or communication parameters, e.g. negotiating bandwidth or QoS [Quality of Service]
    • H04W28/18Negotiating wireless communication parameters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/15Setup of multiple wireless link connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/12Setup of transport tunnels

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device in a multi-standard dual connection.
  • MR-DC Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connection communication system.
  • the terminal 21 can communicate with the master node (MN) 01 and the secondary node (SN) 11 at the same time, MN01 and SN11 can be connected, and both the primary node A and the secondary node B can communicate with the core.
  • the network element 31 is connected.
  • MN01 and SN11 can use different access technologies.
  • MR-DC can include the following scenarios:
  • E-UTRA-NR Dual-Connectivity for Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and New Radio (NR)
  • core network element 31 is an evolved packet core (EPC)
  • MN01 is an evolved node (evolved universal terrestrial radio access network NodeB, eNB)
  • SN11 is a new air interface node (new radio node) nodeB, gNB).
  • MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the X2 interface, MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the user plane; MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the S1 interface, MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the user plane; SN11 and The core network element 31 may be connected through an S1-U interface, and the SN11 core network element 31 may have a user plane connection.
  • NG Next Generation
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • NGEN-DC NGEN-DC
  • the core network element 31 is a fifth generation (5G, 5th Generation) core network (5G, 5GC), MN01 is an eNB, and SN11 is a gNB.
  • 5G, 5th Generation fifth generation
  • MN01 is an eNB
  • SN11 is a gNB.
  • MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the Xn interface, MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the user plane; MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the NG interface, MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the user plane; SN11 and The core network element 31 may be connected through an NG-U interface, and the SN11 core network element 31 may have a user plane connection.
  • the core network element 31 is 5GC, MN01 is gNB, and SN11 is eNB.
  • MN01 and SN11 can be connected.
  • MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the Xn interface.
  • MN01 can be connected with the core network element 31.
  • MN01 and the core network element 31 can have a user plane.
  • Connection; SN11 and core network element 31 can be connected, for example, through the NG-U interface, there can be a user plane connection between SN11 core network element 31.
  • the user plane can have the following six types of bearers, as shown in Figure 5.
  • the following behavior examples introduce the data flow of each bearer type.
  • the uplink is similar to the downlink, and is not repeated here.
  • MN Master Cell Group
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • Media media access control
  • MAC Access Control
  • SCG Secondary cell group
  • the data is sent from the core network element 31 to MN01, and then sent to the RLC layer of SN11 via the PDCP layer of MN01, and then to the terminal 21 via the RLC layer and MAC layer of SN11.
  • the data is sent from the core network element 31 to MN01, and the PDCP layer of MN101 splits the data. Part of the data is sent to the terminal 21 through the RLC and MAC entities of MN01 in turn, and the other part of the data is sent to the RLC layer of SN11 and then SN11 The RLC layer and the MAC layer are sent to the terminal 21.
  • the data is sent from the core network element 31 to SN11.
  • the PDCP layer of SN11 splits the data. Part of the data is sent to the terminal 21 through the RLC and MAC entities of SN11 in turn, and the other part of the data is sent to the RLC layer of MN101 and then MN101 The RLC layer and the MAC layer are sent to the terminal 21.
  • MCG bearer terminated by SN.
  • Data is sent from the core network element 31 to SN11, and then sent to the RLC layer of MN01 via the PDCP layer of SN11, and then sent to the terminal 21 via the RLC layer and MAC layer of MN01.
  • the data is sent from the core network element 31 to the SN11, and then sent to the terminal 21 through the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, and the MAC layer of the SN11 in order.
  • the above MCG bearer relates to MCG air interface resources
  • the SCG bearer relates to SCG air interface resources
  • the split bearer relates to MCG air interface resources and SCG air interface resources.
  • the PDCP entity of the bearer terminating in the MN is on the MN
  • the PDCP entity of the bearer terminating in the SN is on the SN.
  • Both the PDCP entity terminated in the MN and the PDCP entity terminated in the SN can be configured as NR PDCP entities.
  • the NR PDCP entity may add a PDCP sequence number (SN) to each PDCP packet, and is used by the terminal 21 to sort the multiple PDCP packets according to the PDCP SN after receiving multiple PDCP packets.
  • the length of the PDCP SN can have multiple possibilities. For example, the length of the PDCP SN can be 12 bits or 18 bits. How to change the PDCP SN length of the bearer is an urgent problem.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and system in a multi-standard dual connection, which can change the length of the PDCP that is carried.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection.
  • the method can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in a secondary node.
  • the method may include generating a second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer may indicate a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer; when the first PD When the PDCP SN length is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is generated; the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is sent to the MN; wherein, the first The PDCP SN length is the PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the PDCP SN length before the second PDCP SN length.
  • the secondary node sends a PDCP SN length change instruction to the primary node, so that the primary node can learn that the PDCP SN length has changed, and the secondary node and the primary node can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
  • the first bearer terminates at the SN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer in the PDCP SN length to the first PDCP SN length is the same as the bearer type of the first bearer in the PDCP SN length to the second PDCP SN length.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP and SN length is different from the bearer type of the first bearer with a PDCP SN length of the second PDCP and SN length.
  • the method is characterized in that the SN sends the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN, including:
  • the SN sends a secondary node modification request message or a secondary node modification request response message to the MN, and the secondary node modification request message includes the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; and the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  • the method before the secondary node SN generates the second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer, the first bearer terminates at the MN; the method further includes: the SN receives the first PDCP SN length configuration from the MN The first PDCP SN length is configured to indicate the first PDCP SN length.
  • the SN sends the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN, including: sending a secondary node modification request message or a secondary node modification request response message to the MN, the secondary node modification request message, or
  • the secondary node modification request response message includes an indication of the PDCP SN length change of the first bearer.
  • the SN sends the PDCP SN of the first bearer to the MN
  • the length change indication includes: the SN sends a secondary node increase request response message to the MN, and the secondary node increase request response message includes the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the first bearer includes a PDCP entity Added configuration information.
  • the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the first bearer includes a PDCP entity Deleted and added configuration information.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection.
  • the method can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in a secondary node.
  • the method includes: receiving a second PDCP SN length of a second bearer from the MN; before receiving the second PDCP SN length of the second bearer from the MN, the PDCP length of the second bearer is the first PDCP SN length; when the When the length of the second PDCP SN of the second bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the second bearer, it is determined that the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is changed.
  • the MN sends the second PDCP SN length to the SN.
  • the SN can save the second PDCP SN length.
  • the SN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed. When the PDCP SN length can be more than 12 bits and 18 bits, the PDCP SN length changes. There may be many possibilities, and the SN can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, so that the SN can generate the release and increase configuration information of the bearer for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
  • the second bearer when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the first PDCP SN length, the second bearer ends at the MN; when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the second PDCP SN length, The second bearer ends at the MN.
  • the type of the second bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP SN length and the type of the second bearer with the PDCP SN length of the second PDCP SN length are the same.
  • the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the length of the first PDCP SN and the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the second PDCP SN length are different.
  • the method further includes: generating the first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes the release of the RLC entity And added configuration information.
  • the second bearer when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the first PDCP SN length, the second bearer terminates at the SN; when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the second PDCP SN length, The second bearer ends at the MN; the method further includes: the SN sends the first PDCP SN length to the MN.
  • the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes a PDCP entity Released configuration information.
  • the method is characterized in that the first configuration information of the second bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: the SN generates the first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes the RLC entity Release and added configuration information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-system dual connection, which can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node.
  • the method includes: receiving a PDCP SN length change indication of a first bearer from an SN; and storing the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the primary node By receiving the PDCP SN length change instruction from the secondary node through the primary node, the primary node can be informed that the PDCP SN length has changed, so that the secondary node and the primary node can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal, thereby completing the PDCP SN length change.
  • the first bearer ends at the SN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length changes and the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length changes are the same.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length changes and the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length changes are different.
  • the method further includes: the MN receives the SN configuration information of the first bearer from the SN; and the MN sends the SN configuration information of the first bearer to the UE.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the first The second configuration information carried includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the first bearer ends at the MN;
  • the method further includes: the MN sends the PDCP SN length before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is changed to the SN.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the first The second configuration information carried includes release configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the method further includes: the MN generates second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; the MN sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the The second configuration information of the first bearer includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection, which can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node.
  • the method includes: generating a second PDCP SN length of the second bearer; before generating the second PDCP SN length of the second bearer, the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is the first PDCP SN length; when the second bearer When the second PDCP SN length is different from the first PDCP SN length of the second bearer, it is determined that the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is changed.
  • the MN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed. When the PDCP SN length is not only 12bit or 18bit, there can be many possibilities for the PDCP SN length change. The MN can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby The MN can generate the release of the bearer and the added configuration information for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
  • the second bearer ends at the MN.
  • the type of the second bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP SN length and the type of the second bearer with the PDCP SN length of the second PDCP SN length are the same.
  • the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the length of the first PDCP SN and the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the second PDCP SN length are different.
  • the method further includes: receiving first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information of the second bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: receiving the first PDCP SN length from the SN.
  • the SN may carry the first PDCP SN length in a cell that the MN can read, and the MN may read the first PDCP SN length.
  • the MN may save the first PDCP SN length.
  • the first PDCP SN length is sent to the MN through the SN, the MN reads the first PDCP SN length, and the MN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
  • the method further includes: receiving the first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes the released configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the method further includes: the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: receiving first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in the secondary node.
  • the communication device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the method of the first aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node.
  • the communication device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program for implementing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the program runs in a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device is caused to execute the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program for implementing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the program runs in a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device is caused to execute the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product.
  • the program product includes a program that, when the program is executed, causes the foregoing method of the first aspect or the second aspect to be executed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product.
  • the program product includes a program, and when the program is executed, the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect is executed.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connection communication system
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an EN-DC
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a NGEN-DC
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an NG-DC
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a user plane bearer type in MR-DC
  • FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture with MN01;
  • 6b is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture with SN11;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture in which MN01 and SN11 are both;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length
  • FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN;
  • 12b is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN;
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing a PDCP SN length under a CU-DU architecture
  • 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1700
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
  • the technical solution in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
  • the core network element, MN, SN, and terminal included in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 are only examples, and the connection relationship between the core network element and the MN or SN is only one.
  • the type and number of network elements included in the communication system, and the connection relationship between the network elements are not limited to this.
  • MN01 when MN01 is a gNB, MN01 can be a Centralized Unit (CU) -Distributed Unit (DU) architecture, and MN01 can include CU0111 and DU0121.
  • MN01 in NG DC, MN01 is a gNB, MN01 can be a CU-DU architecture, and MN01 can include CU0111 and DU0121.
  • CU0111 is connected to DU0121, for example, through the F1 interface
  • CU0111 is connected to the core network element 31, for example, through the NG interface.
  • Figure 6a illustrates one CU0111 and DU0121 as an example.
  • the multiple DU0121s can share one CU0111, and the multiple DU0121s are all connected to CU0111, for example, through an F1 interface.
  • SN11 when SN11 is a gNB, SN11 can be a CU-DU architecture, and SN11 can include CU1111 and DU1121.
  • SN11 in EN-DC or NGEN-DC, SN11 is a gNB and SN11 can be a CU-DU architecture.
  • SN11 can include CU1111 and DU1121.
  • CU1111 and DU1121 are connected, for example, through the F1 interface, and CU1111 is connected to the core network element 31, for example, through the NG interface.
  • Figure 6b illustrates one CU1111 and DU1121 as an example. In the embodiment of this application, there may be multiple DU1121.
  • the multiple DU1121s can share one CU1111, and the multiple DU1121s are all connected to the CU1111, for example, through an F1 interface.
  • CU-DU architecture Under the CU-DU architecture, some functions of MN01 are deployed on CU0111, and other functions of MN01 are deployed on DU0121.
  • the functional division of CU0111 and DU0121 can be divided according to the wireless protocol stack.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the functions and functional division of CU1111 and DU1121 can refer to the related content of the functions and functional division of CU0111 and DU0121 when the MN01 adopts the CU-DU architecture, which will not be repeated here.
  • MN01 when the bearer ends at MN01 (or SN11), MN01 (or SN11) can change the PDCP SN length.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a solution.
  • this solution when the PDCP SN length of a bearer is changed, the bearer performs release and increase.
  • the interaction between MN01 and SN11 enables both MN01 and SN11 to know that the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby ensuring that MN01 and the terminal 21 can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal 21 at the same time.
  • the above scheme may specifically include the first scheme, the second scheme, and the third scheme.
  • SN11 can generate a new PDCP SN length for the PDCP anchor bearer on SN11.
  • SN11 sends the PDCP SN length to MN01.
  • MN01 and SN11 generate the release and addition configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21.
  • SN11 can send the PDCP SN length to MN01, and MN01 and SN11 can save the PDCP SN length.
  • MN01 and SN11 generate terminal bearer release and increase configuration information.
  • a PDCP SN length can be fixedly used.
  • MN01 and SN11 can learn that the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby generating the release of the bearer for the terminal 21. And added configuration information.
  • Generating the PDCP SN length of the first bearer can be understood as generating the PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer, and the PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer can indicate the PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • Sending or receiving the PDCP SN length of the first bearer can be understood as sending or receiving the PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer, and the PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer can indicate the PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer can be understood on the MN (or SN) as the PDCP anchor point of the first bearer on the MN (or) SN; or, the first bearer terminates on the MN (or SN); or, the MN ( Or a SN) PDCP entity exists on the first bearer, or a PDCP entity exists on the MN (or SN) on the first bearer.
  • the RLC entity (or MAC entity) where the first bearer exists on the MN (or SN) can be understood as the existence of the RLC entity (or MAC entity) on the MN (or SN).
  • the configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of one or more entities of the PDCP entity, the RLC entity, and the MAC entity of the first bearer.
  • Different entities may have different names for entity operations, such as release or addition, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the increase of the MAC entity can be understood as the increase of the logical channel; or the release of the MAC entity can be understood as the release of the logical channel or the reset of the MAC entity.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
  • SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. This may be referred to as SN11 generating the second PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the node where the PDCP entity of the bearer can generate PDCP SN those skilled in the art can understand that when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11, that is, the first bearer is terminated SN.
  • the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may indicate that the PDCP SN length of the first bearer has changed.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is generated or determined at SN11. Before, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer was the length of the first PDCP SN.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP SN
  • the PDCP of the first bearer SN is the second PDCP SN length.
  • the first bearer terminates at the SN.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11.
  • SN11 can store the PDCP length of the first bearer.
  • the PDCP configuration of the first PDCP SN length, such as the first PDCP. SN length, SN11 can read the first PDCP SN length, and then compare it with the second PDCP SN length, and generate a PDCP SN length change indication for the first bearer if they are not consistent.
  • the first bearer before and after the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is changed, the first bearer is terminated at the SN, that is, the PDCP entities of the first bearer are all at SN11. Specifically, it may include but is not limited to the following possibilities: (1) The first bearer bears the same type before and after the PDCP SN length changes. For example, the first bearer bears the type before the PDCP SN length changes and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the first bearer has a different bearer type before and after the SN length change, for example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is SN-terminated MCG bearer, the first bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before PDCP SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • a bearer whose PDCP SN length changes is a SN-terminated MCG bearer or a SN-terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before the PDCP SN length is changed is an SN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer is in PDCP
  • the bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the first bearer ends at the MN. That is, before the first bearer PDCP SN length changes, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01, and MN01 can store the PDCP length of the first bearer PDCP and the PDCP related configuration of the first PDCP SN length, such as the first PDCP SN length, MN01 can read the first PDCP SN length, and then MN01 sends the first PDCP SN length to SN11. After SN11 receives the first PDCP SN length, it compares it with the second PDCP SN length, and generates a PDCP SN length change indication.
  • the first bearer ends at the MN before the PDCP SN length changes, and the first bearer ends at the SN after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is an MN terminated MCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length change is an SN terminated MCG bearer, SN-terminated SCG bearer or SN-terminated split bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is the MN-terminated SCG bearer
  • the first bearer after the PDCP SN length change is the SN-terminated MCG Bearer, SN-terminated SCG bearer, or SN-terminated split bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is the MN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer after the
  • S803 SN11 sends a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to MN01.
  • a secondary node modification request message (SN modification request) or a secondary node modification request response (SN modification request request) message may carry a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node may add a request response message (SN addition request knowledge), the secondary node modify the request message, or the modification request response message carrying the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • a request response message SN addition request knowledge
  • the secondary node may also add a request response message or the secondary node modification request response message to carry the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • MN01 can save after receiving the PDCP SN length change instruction sent by SN11.
  • MN01 can learn the new PDCP SN length according to the PDCP SN length change instruction, such as the second PDCP SN length, and MN01 can save the second PDCP SN length, so that MN01 can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed in the future.
  • the PDCP SN length change instruction such as the second PDCP SN length
  • S804-S806 can also be included.
  • S804 may occur simultaneously with S801, that is, when SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer may be generated.
  • the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be implemented by a cell including both the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier.
  • SN11 is gNB
  • it can be implemented by using the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0.
  • the first configuration information may include RadioBearerConfig, and RadioBearerConfig includes The release configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, the DRB-ToReleaseList in RadioBearerConfig includes the bearer identifier 1, and the RadioBearerConfig includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, the DRB-ToAddMod in the RadioBearerConfig includes the bearer identifier 1.
  • RadioBearerConfig includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, the DRB-ToAddMod in the RadioBearerConfig includes the bearer identifier 1.
  • the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the first embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the first configuration information may further include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, which can be implemented by one cell including both the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier or a logical channel identifier.
  • SN11 is gNB, for example, in the EN-DC or NGEN-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the CellGroupConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0.
  • the first configuration information may include CellGroupConfig, and CellGroupConfig includes Release configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToReleaseList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1, and CellGroupConfig includes added configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToAddModList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1.
  • CellGroupConfig includes Release configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToReleaseList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1
  • CellGroupConfig includes added configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToAddModList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1.
  • SN11 is an eNB, for example, in the NE-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the RadioResourceConfigDedicated cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0.
  • the first configuration information can include RadioResourceConfigDedicated, DRB-ToReleaseList in RadioResourceConfigDedicated
  • the bearer identifier 1 is included, and the DRB-ToAddMod includes the bearer identifier 1.
  • the first configuration information including the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity may include, but is not limited to, the possibility that the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is an SN terminated SCG bearer, and the first bearer is in the PDCP SN
  • the bearer type after the length change is an SN-terminated SCG bearer or the SN-terminated split bearer; or, the bearer type before the PDCP SN length change is the SN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer is the PDCP SN-length changed
  • the bearer type is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first configuration information may be carried by the secondary node modification request response message or the secondary node modification request message.
  • the first configuration information includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be achieved by including the added configuration information of the PDCP entity in a cell, for example, it can be implemented by adding an identifier in a cell, and the identifier can be a bearer identifier. .
  • the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0.
  • the first configuration information can include RadioBearerConfig, and RadioBearerConfig includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • DRB-ToAddMod in the RadioBearerConfig cell includes Bearer ID 1.
  • the first configuration information may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01, and the MN01 can generate the PDCP entity release for the terminal 21 Configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the second embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information includes related content in the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and details are not described herein again.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01 before the PDCP SN length is changed, and the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11 after the PDCP SN length is changed, and the PDCP entity of MN01 and the PDCP entity of SN11 are both You can configure PDCP entities of the same standard, such as NR and PDCP entities.
  • the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity can be generated directly by SN11.
  • MN01 does not need to generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21, which can simplify the network. And terminal implementation complexity.
  • the first configuration information includes added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the second embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the first configuration information may further include an RLC entity. Release and added configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes related content in the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and may include but is not limited to the possibility that the bearer type of the first bearer before the SN length change is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN, and the first bearer is in the PDCP.
  • the bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before PDSN SN length change bearer type is MN terminated split bearer, the first bearer after PDCP SN length change
  • the bearer type is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the secondary node may add a request response message, and the secondary node modification request response message carries the first configuration information.
  • the secondary node may also add a request response message or the secondary node modification request response message to carry the first configuration information.
  • S803 and S805 may occur simultaneously.
  • the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in the same message as the first configuration information of the first bearer and sent by SN11 to MN01.
  • S806: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
  • the MN01 may send an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal 21, and the RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S807-S808 can also be included.
  • S807: MN01 generates second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the second configuration information includes configuration information of RLC release and addition.
  • the second configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, which can be implemented by one cell including both the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier or a logical channel identifier.
  • MN01 is a gNB
  • the identifier may be a bearer identifier or a logical channel identifier.
  • MN01 is a gNB
  • the first configuration information may include CellGroupConfig
  • CellGroupConfig includes the release of the RLC entity.
  • rlc-BearerToReleaseList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1
  • CellGroupConfig includes added configuration information for RLC entities, for example, rlc-BearerToAddModList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1.
  • MN01 is an eNB
  • the second configuration information can include RadioResourceConfigDedicated and RadioResourceConfigDedicated.
  • the DRB-ToReleaseList includes the bearer identifier 1
  • the DRB-ToAddMod includes the bearer identifier 1.
  • the second configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and may include, but is not limited to, the possibility that the first bearer is a SN terminated MCG bearer before the SN length changes, and the first bearer is a PDCP
  • the bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first bearer type before PDSN is the SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first bearer is PDCP after SN length change.
  • the second configuration information includes configuration information of release of a PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be implemented by one cell including the release configuration information of the PDCP entity. Specifically, it can be implemented by deleting an identifier in a cell, and the identifier can be Bearer ID. For example, it can be implemented using the RadioBearerConfig information element in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0.
  • the second configuration information may include RadioBearerConfig
  • RadioBearerConfig includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, DRB-ToReleaseList in the RadioBearerConfig information element includes
  • the bearer identifier 1 can implement the processing of deleting a bearer RLC entity and then adding it in a configuration message, thereby realizing the change of the PDCP SN length.
  • the MN01 can generate the PDCP entity release for the terminal 21
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity is added by the SN11 to the terminal 21 for the PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity
  • the second configuration information may further include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the second configuration information includes related content of RLC release and added configuration information, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second configuration information may also include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity: the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is MN terminated MCG bearer, the first bearer bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer bearer type before PDCP SN length change is MN terminated split bearer.
  • a bearer whose PDCP SN length is changed is a SN terminated MCG bearer or a SN terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  • the second configuration information may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the SN11 may generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21.
  • the second configuration information includes related content of RLC release and added configuration information, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second configuration information may include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity: the bearer type before the PDCP SN length change is the MCG terminated by the MN Bearer, the first bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or the first bearer before PDCP SN length change is MN terminated split bearer, first The bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer.
  • S808: MN01 sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
  • MN01 may send an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal 21, where the RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S806 and S808 may occur at the same time.
  • MN01 sends a message to terminal 21, the message carries both the first configuration information and the second configuration information of the first bearer, and the message may be an RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the following describes how to change the PDCP SN length in the SN increase request process in combination with the SN increase request process.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer can be the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, MN01 can decide the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and the first bearer can be terminated after adding the secondary node.
  • SN that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the type of the bearer of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the secondary node addition request message may include:
  • it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • MCG resources exist in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and there is no SCG resource, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is the SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the first bearer after adding the secondary node has MCG resources and SCG resources, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity carried on the first bearer on MN01 includes the PDCP SN length of the first bearer on MN01, that is, the first PDCP SN length in FIG. 8, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the first bearer on the MN01 may be used to assist the SN11 to generate configuration information of a new PDCP entity.
  • S902-S907 are further described as an example of S801-S808.
  • S902 SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • SN11 may decide to generate the PDCP SN length, that is, the second PDCP SN length in S801 in FIG. 8, for example, the second PDCP SN length is 18 bits.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that before the SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, The PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length. It can also be understood that before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, and the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes. Then, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the second PDCP SN.
  • the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer is 12 bits
  • the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is 18 bits
  • the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN
  • SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • S902 may occur at the same time as S904, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
  • the type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is the MCG bearer terminated by MN.
  • the PDCP entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity of the first bearer are all on MN01.
  • the first PDCP entity carried by the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the RLC entity or MAC entity may or may not be on SN11, and the RLC entity or MAC entity may or may not be on MN01.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is SN.
  • Terminated MCG bearer PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11, RLC entity and MAC entity of the first bearer are on MN01; after adding a secondary node, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer, and PDCP of the first bearer Entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity are on SN11; after adding a secondary node, the first bearer bearer type is an SN-terminated split bearer, the first bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, and the first bearer RLC entity and MAC entity are on MN01 and On SN11.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the additional configuration information of the entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as added configuration information of the PDCP entity; or, for example, the first configuration information may include release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, MN01 and SN11 All PDCPs can be NR PDCP, MN01 can generate the release information of PDCP entity for terminal 21, or it can directly generate the release configuration information of PDCP entity while generating the additional configuration information of PDCP entity by SN11, MN01 is not needed at this time Regenerate the configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity, such as added configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the secondary node is added is the MN terminated MCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is the SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the addition of the PDCP entity. Configuration information or release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the secondary node is added is an MN terminated MCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the added configuration information of the PDCP entity or the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, as well as the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the added configuration information of the MAC entity.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity on MN01 or SN01 may be implemented by the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0; the configuration of the RLC entity and the MAC entity of MN01 or SN01
  • the information can be implemented through the CellGroupConfig cell in 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0 section 6.3.2 or the RadioResourceConfigDedicated cell in 3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0 section 6.3.2.
  • S905 SN11 sends a secondary node addition request response message to MN01.
  • the secondary node addition request response message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node may define a new cell in the request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in this new cell.
  • S906: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release and addition of the entity.
  • Configuration information if the previous entity (such as PDCP entity, RLC entity, or MAC entity) of the secondary node is added on MN01, the entity is not on MN01 after the secondary node is added, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity Configuration information.
  • the second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, release information of the PDCP entity.
  • the MN01 generates the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the SN 11 generates the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21.
  • the second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as the release and addition configuration information of the RLC entity and the release and addition configuration information of the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is the MN terminated MCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is the SN terminated MCG or the SN terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information released by the RLC entity and configuration information released by the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is an MN terminated MCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated SCG bearer
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the identifier of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S910 The terminal 21 and the SN11 complete random access.
  • the following describes how to change the PDCP and SN length in the secondary node modification process in conjunction with the secondary node triggering the secondary node modification process.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer can be on SN11.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is SN terminated MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN.
  • SN11 can maintain PDCP configuration. For example, through the secondary node modification process, SN11 can modify the PDCP SN length without changing the bearer type.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
  • S1001: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the length of the second PDCP SN may be 12 bits.
  • the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • S1002: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S1002 may occur simultaneously with S1001, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer remains unchanged.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11.
  • the RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be on SN11.
  • the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • One bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, RLC entity and MAC entity are not on SN11; the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer, the first bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and MAC entity are on On SN11.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity and the Added configuration information.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first bearer is an MCG bearer terminated by an SN
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and addition configuration information of the PDCP entity, and release and addition configuration of the RLC entity and the MAC entity. information.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that before the SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, The PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length. It can also be understood that before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, and the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes. Then, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the second PDCP SN.
  • the first bearer Before changing the PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at SN11. SN11 can obtain the first PDCP SN length.
  • the first PDCP SN length can be 18 bits.
  • the length of the first PDCP SN may be 18 bits
  • the length of the second PDCP SN may be 12 bits
  • the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN
  • SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • S1004 SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
  • the secondary node modification request message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • a new cell can be defined in the secondary node modification request message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer can be carried in this new cell.
  • MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity and the added configuration. information.
  • the second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as the release and addition configuration information of the RLC entity and the release and addition configuration information of the MAC entity.
  • the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer or an SN-terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by an SN
  • the first bearer is not physically located on MN01, and the second configuration information of the first bearer may not be generated.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the identifier of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the following describes how to change the PDCP SN length in the secondary node modification process in conjunction with the secondary node modification process.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer may be on the SN11.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is SN termination.
  • MN01 can initiate a secondary node modification process, or SN11 can request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process to change the bearer type of the first bearer, for example, the type of the first bearer is MN terminated MCG bearer, MN terminated SCG Bearer or split bearer terminated by MN.
  • the MN01 can initiate the secondary node modification process, or the SN11 can request the MN01 to initiate the secondary node modification process.
  • the above six types of bearers of the first bearer can be used to change or not change the bearer type, and the PDCP and SN length can be modified by SN11. .
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
  • S1101: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer can be MN terminated MCG bearer, MN terminated SCG bearer, MN terminated split bearer, SN terminated MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN terminated split bearer.
  • MN01 can modify the bearer type of the first bearer through the secondary node modification request message.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer can be changed to the SN-terminated bearer type.
  • the three types of MN-terminated bearer types can be modified to any kind of SN. Terminated bearer type.
  • the above-mentioned SN-terminated bearer type can be modified to the other two SN-terminated bearer types.
  • the secondary node modification request message may include:
  • the modified bearer type may be an SN terminated bearer type.
  • it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists in the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
  • the first bearer terminates on MN01, which may include configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer on MN01, and may include the PDCP SN length of the first bearer on MN01, That is, the first PDCP SN length in FIG. 8, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the first bearer on the MN01 may be used to assist the SN11 to generate configuration information of a new PDCP entity.
  • S1100 can also be included.
  • S1100 SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
  • MN11 may request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process.
  • S1102 SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer can be terminated at the SN, and the SN11 can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, that is, the second PDCP SN length in S801 in FIG. 8, such as the second PDCP SN length It is 18bit.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN.
  • the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer is 12 bits
  • the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is 18 bits
  • the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN
  • SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • S1104: SN11 generates first configuration information of a first bearer.
  • S1103 can occur simultaneously with S1102, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
  • the first bearer Before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the SN.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer may be at SN11 before the bearer type is changed.
  • the RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be at SN11.
  • the RLC entity or the MAC entity may or may not be at.
  • the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01.
  • the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer, the PDCP entity, The RLC entity and the MAC entity are on SN11; for example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is the split bearer terminated by SN, the PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01 and SN01.
  • the first bearer may be terminated at the SN.
  • the entity on the SN11 refer to the related description of the first bearer entity on the SN11 before the bearer type is changed.
  • the first bearer Before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the MN. Before the bearer type is changed, the PDCP entity of the first bearer may be on MN01, the RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be on MN01, and the RLC entity or the MAC entity may be on or off. On SN11.
  • the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the PDCP entity is on MN01, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on the MN01; for example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is the MN terminated SCG bearer, the PDCP entity can On MN01, the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on SN11; for example, before changing the bearer type, the first bearer is the split bearer terminated by MN, the PDCP entity is on MN01, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01 and SN01. After the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the SN. For the entity on the SN11, refer to the related description of the first bearer entity on the SN11 before the bearer type is changed.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the addition of the entity.
  • the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity And added configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on SN11 before the bearer type was changed, the entity was not on SN11 after the bearer type was changed, and the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the Release configuration information for the entity.
  • the first bearer terminates in the SN, that is, the first bearer is modified from the SN-terminated MCG bearer, the SN-terminated SCG bearer, or the SN-terminated split bearer.
  • the other of the SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of a PDCP entity, such as release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN-terminated SCG bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN-terminated split bearer
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is SN. Terminated split bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the SCG bearer terminated by SN.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the release of the PDCP entity and the added configuration information, and the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity. Added configuration information.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP. Release information of the entity and added configuration information and release configuration information of the RLC entity and MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated split bearer or an SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity and the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first bearer terminates at the MN, that is, one of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the SCG bearer terminated by the SN, or the split bearer terminated by the SN is modified to the SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated
  • the SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer may include the following:
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as added configuration information of the PDCP entity, or, for example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and addition of PDCP Configuration information.
  • the PDCP of MN01 and SN11 can both be NR and PDCP.
  • MN01 can generate the release information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21, or it can directly generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity while generating the additional configuration information of the PDCP entity. At this time, MN01 does not need to generate the configuration information of the release of the PDCP entity again.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is the SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration of the PDCP entity. Information or PDCP release and added configuration information.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated SCG bearer or the MN terminated split bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first configuration information carried may include configuration information of the PDCP entity or configuration information of release and addition of the PDCP, and configuration information of release and addition of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN or the split bearer of the MN terminates.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer It may include configuration information of the PDCP entity or release and addition configuration information of the PDCP, and configuration information of release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • S1105: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
  • the secondary node modification request response message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • a new cell can be defined in the secondary node modification request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer can be carried in this new cell.
  • S1106: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
  • the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the addition of the entity.
  • the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity And added configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on MN01 before the bearer type was changed, the entity was not on MN01 after the bearer type was changed, and the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the Release configuration information for the entity.
  • the first bearer terminates in the SN, that is, the first bearer is modified from the SN-terminated MCG bearer, the SN-terminated SCG bearer, or the SN-terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer, and after modifying the bearer type, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated split bearer; or before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN terminated. Split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer is The configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity may be included.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer is Added configuration information for RLC entities and MAC entities may be included.
  • the first bearer terminates at the MN, that is, one of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the SCG bearer terminated by the SN, or the split bearer terminated by the SN is modified to the SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated
  • the SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer may include the following:
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of a PDCP entity, such as deleted configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include deletion of the PDCP entity. MN01 may not generate the second configuration information, or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or the split bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer is It may include deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, or does not include deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP.
  • the deleted configuration information of the entity or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the released configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
  • S1107: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, first configuration information of the first bearer, and second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S1109: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation (SN) confirmation message to SN11.
  • SN secondary node modification confirmation
  • FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
  • the first bearer can be terminated at the SN.
  • SN11 can request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process to modify the bearer type of the first bearer.
  • the modified first bearer is terminated at the SN.
  • the bearer type can be modified to two other SN-terminated bearer types.
  • S1201: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • S1203 SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
  • the secondary node modification request message includes a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
  • a new cell may be defined in the secondary node addition request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in this new cell.
  • S1205: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S1206 SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
  • S1207: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • S1208: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, first configuration information of the first bearer, and second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S1210: MN01 sends a SN modification confirmation message to the SN11.
  • the MN01 and SN01 exchange PDCP SN length change instructions, so that MN01 and SN11 generate the release and added configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21 to complete the PDCP SN length change.
  • the PDCP SN length can be 12 bits or 18 bits
  • MN01 can learn the new PDCP SN length in combination with the PDCP SN length saved by MN01, so that MN01 can determine the PDCP SN length in the future. Whether it has changed so that subsequent releases and additions of configuration information are generated for the bearer.
  • FIG. 12b is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
  • S12b01: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • S12b02: SN11 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
  • the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN.
  • the first bearer ends at the SN, and SN11 can obtain the first PDCP SN length.
  • the first bearer terminates at the MN, and may further include the MN01 sending the first PDCP SN length to the SN11, for example, a request message may be added through a secondary node The secondary node sends a first PDCP SN length to modify the request message.
  • the steps of S1203 and S1205-S1208 can also be included.
  • S1203 can occur simultaneously with S1201, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • S12b04: SN11 sends the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer to MN01.
  • SN11 may send the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer through the secondary node adding a request message, a secondary node modification request message, or a secondary node modification request message.
  • SN11 may send a second PDCP SN length to MN01 when it determines that the PDCP SN length changes in S1202.
  • SN11 may send the second PDCP SN length to MN01 after generating the second PDCP SN length. That is, when the PDCP SN length changes or does not change, SN11 can send the second PDCP SN length to MN01.
  • MN01 can read the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • MN01 can save the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • SN11 may carry the second PDCP SN length in a cell that MN01 will read, and send it to MN01.
  • SN11 may define a new cell that includes the second PDCP SN length, and MN01 may read the second PDCP SN length in the cell.
  • SN11 can add the configuration response generated by SN11 for terminal 21 in the secondary node add request response message.
  • the configuration information can be a container.
  • the container can be Including the second PDCP SN length, but at this time MN01 is not required to read the content of the container, so MN01 will not read the second PDCP SN length carried in the container.
  • S12b05: SN11 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to MN01.
  • S1204 and S1205 can occur at the same time.
  • the second PDCP SN length and the first configuration information of the first bearer can be sent to MN01 in the same message, such as a secondary node addition request response message or a secondary node modification request response. Message.
  • S12b06: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
  • S12b07: MN01 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
  • the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the first bearer terminates at the SN, and SN11 can send the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer to MN01.
  • SN11 can send the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer to MN01.
  • the first bearer ends at the MN, and MN01 can obtain the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • S12b08: MN01 is the second configuration information for generating the first bearer.
  • S12b09: MN01 sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 31.
  • S12b09 and S12b06 can occur simultaneously.
  • SN11 sends a message to MN01.
  • the message includes the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the message is an RRC connection reconfiguration message. .
  • MN01 and SN11 are respectively used to determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, so that MN01 and SN11 generate the release and added configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21 to complete the PDCP SN length change.
  • MN01 and SN11 can know the latest PDCP SN length, MN01 And SN11 can more accurately determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
  • MN01 and SN11 can store the PDCP SN length corresponding to each bearer type.
  • MN01 or SN11 can know whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
  • MN01 And SN11 generate release information and added configuration information for the bearer for the terminal 21.
  • bearers involving single air interface resources can be configured, such as MN terminated or SN terminated MCG bearers, MN terminated or SN terminated SCG bearers are a PDCP SN length, such as 12-bit PDCP SN length;
  • the bearer such as the MN-terminated or SN-terminated split bearer, has a different PDCP SN length, such as an 18-bit PDCP SN length.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
  • S1301 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
  • SN11 can be determined by the following steps: (1) determining whether the bearer type of the first bearer has changed, (2) whether the PDCP corresponding to the bearer type before the change and the PDCP SN length corresponding to the changed bearer type have occurred Variety.
  • the SN11 may receive the bearer type of the first bearer from the MN01, for example, it may add a request message through a secondary node and modify the request message through a secondary node.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer changes.
  • SN11 shows that the PDCP length of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN is 12 bits.
  • the SN length is 18 bits, so the PDCP SN length changes.
  • S1302: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer for the terminal 21.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the first bearer entity on SN11.
  • the first configuration information may include the release information of the entity; when the entity is on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, and on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, the first configuration information may include the release and addition of the entity Configuration information; when the entity is not on SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes and on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, the first configuration information may include additional information for the entity, and the entity may be a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity .
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer may be sent through the secondary node adding a request response message or the secondary node modifying a request response message.
  • S1304: MN01 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
  • S1305: MN01 generates second configuration information of the first bearer for the terminal 21.
  • the second configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the first bearer entity on MN01.
  • the second configuration information may include the release information of the entity; when the entity is on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, and on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information may include the release and addition of the entity Configuration information; when the entity is not on MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes and on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, the second set of information may include additional information about the entity, and the entity may be a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity .
  • S1306: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer may be sent through the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • MN01 or SN11 can adopt the CU-DU architecture.
  • Part of the protocol layer can be deployed on the CU.
  • Part of the protocol layer can be deployed on the DU.
  • the PDCP layer is deployed on the CU below.
  • the RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical The layer is deployed on the DU as an example.
  • the action sent or received by the SN11 may be performed by the CU1111.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity in the first configuration information of the first bearer generated by the SN11 is generated by the CU1111, and the configuration information of the RLC entity or the configuration information of the MAC entity in the first configuration information is generated by the DU1121.
  • CU1111 can generate a PDCP SN length change instruction, CU1111 can send a PDCP SN length change instruction to the DU1121, and DU1121 generates RLC entity configuration information or MAC configuration information according to the PDCP SN length change instruction of the first bearer.
  • the CU1111 may send a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN01, for example, CU0111.
  • CU1111 can generate the PDCP SN length, CU1111 can send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU1121, and DU1121 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and generates configuration information or MAC of the RLC entity Configuration information.
  • the CU1111 may send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to the MN01, for example, to the CU0111.
  • the action sent or received by MN01 may be performed by CU0111.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity in the second configuration information of the first bearer generated by MN01 is generated by CU0111, and the configuration information of the RLC entity or MAC entity in the second configuration information is generated by DU0121.
  • CU0111 can send the first The PDCP SN length change instruction of one bearer, DU0112 generates configuration information of the RLC entity or MAC configuration information according to the PDCP SN length change instruction of the first bearer.
  • CU0111 may receive a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer from SN11, for example, CU1111, and then may send a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to DU0112.
  • CU0111 can generate the PDCP SN length, CU0111 can send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU0121, and DU0121 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and generates configuration information or MAC of the RLC entity Configuration information. CU0111 may send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to SN11, for example, to CU1111.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length under a CU-DU architecture. Taking CU1111 and DU1121 as examples for description, those skilled in the art can understand that the same applies to CU0111 and DU0121.
  • S1402 CU1111 sends a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to DU1121.
  • CU1111 sends the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU1121, and CU1111 may carry the PDCP SN length of the first bearer in the cell read by DU1121.
  • CU1111 may define a A new cell, which carries the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and the DU1121 reads the PDCP SN length of the first bearer from the cell.
  • S1403: DU1121 generates configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity.
  • the DU1121 can generate configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity according to the PDCP SN length change indication.
  • DU1121 can read the PDCP SN length sent by CU1111, and DU1121 can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer. Configuration information or MAC configuration information.
  • S1404: DU1121 sends the configuration information of the RLC entity and the configuration information of the MAC entity to the CU1111.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity may include released configuration information, added configuration information, or released and added configuration information of the PDCP entity in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the configuration information of the RLC entity may include the released configuration information, the added configuration information, or the released and added configuration information of the RLC entity in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the configuration information of the MAC entity may include released configuration information, added configuration information, or released and added configuration information of the MAC entity in the embodiments of the present application.
  • MN01 may have functional units corresponding to the MN01 method or process steps
  • SN11 may have functional units corresponding to the SN11 method or process steps.
  • SN11 may include a generating unit and a communication unit, and the generating unit may generate a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and the generating unit may also be configured when the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP When the first PDCP SN length of a bearer is generated, the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is generated, and the communication unit may send the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN.
  • the generating unit may be further configured to generate first configuration information of the first bearer, and the communication unit is configured to send the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN01.
  • SN11 may include a communication unit and a storage unit.
  • the communication unit may be used to receive a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer from the SN, and the storage unit may be used to store the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
  • the SN11 may further include a generating unit, which may be configured to generate the second configuration information of the first bearer, and the communication unit may send the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21 Configuration information.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device.
  • MN01 or SN11 may refer to the structure shown in FIG. 15.
  • the access network device includes at least one processor 1511, at least one memory 1512, at least one transceiver 1513, at least one network interface 1514, and one or more antennas 1515.
  • the processor 1511, the memory 1512, the transceiver 1513, and the network interface 1514 are connected, for example, through a bus.
  • the antenna 1515 is connected to the transceiver 1513.
  • the network interface 1514 is used to enable the access network device to connect with other communication devices through a communication link, for example, the access network device is connected to the core network element 101 through an S1 interface.
  • the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of the following types: a general-purpose central processing unit (Central Processing Unit), a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), a microprocessor, Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Microcontroller Unit (MCU), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or integrated circuit for implementing logic operations .
  • the processor 1111 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor.
  • the at least one processor 1111 may be integrated in one chip or located on multiple different chips.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of the following types: read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, and can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM).
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • the memory can also be a compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other disc storage, disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.) , Magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • CD-ROM compact disc
  • disc storage including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • Magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the memory 1512 may exist independently and is connected to the processor 1511.
  • the memory 1512 may also be integrated with the processor 1511, for example, integrated in a chip.
  • the memory 1512 can store program code that executes the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1511.
  • the executed computer program codes can also be regarded as the driver program of the processor 1511.
  • the processor 1511 is configured to execute computer program code stored in the memory 1512, so as to implement the technical solution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1513 may be used to support reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the access network device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1513 may be connected to the antenna 1515.
  • the transceiver 1513 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
  • one or more antennas 1515 may receive a radio frequency signal
  • a receiver Rx of the transceiver 1513 is configured to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and convert the digital
  • the baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1511, so that the processor 1511 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing.
  • the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1513 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1511, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a Or multiple antennas 1515 send the radio frequency signal.
  • the receiver Rx may selectively perform one or more levels of downmix processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal.
  • the sequence is adjustable.
  • the transmitter Tx may selectively perform one or more levels of upmixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal.
  • the upmixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing The sequence is adjustable.
  • Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
  • the access network device can implement the method performed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1111 can generate a second PDCP length of the first bearer and a PDCP of the first bearer.
  • SN length change indication, the first configuration information of the first bearer the processor 1111 may send the PDCP of the first bearer to the MN01 through the network interface 1114, the SN length change indication and the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the memory 1112 may store the first The length of the PDCP SN carried, such as the length of the first PDCP SN and / or the length of the second PDCP SN.
  • the access network device can implement the method performed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application. For example, it can receive the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer and the first bearer through the network interface 1114.
  • the first configuration information the processor 1111 may generate the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer, and the antenna 1115 may send the first configuration information of the first bearer and the first bearer first configuration information to the terminal 21.
  • the memory 1112 may store the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the first PDCP SN length and / or the second PDCP SN length.
  • FIG. 16 it is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the structure of the terminal 21 reference may be made to the structure shown in FIG.
  • the terminal includes at least one processor 1611, at least one transceiver 1612, and at least one memory 1613.
  • the processor 1611, the memory 1613, and the transceiver 1612 are connected.
  • the terminal 21 may further include an output device 1614, an input device 1615, and one or more antennas 1616.
  • the antenna 1616 is connected to the transceiver 1612, and the output device 1614 and the input device 1615 are connected to the processor 1611.
  • transceiver 1612 For the transceiver 1612, the memory 1613, and the antenna 1616, reference may be made to the related description in FIG. 15 to implement similar functions.
  • the processor 1611 may be a baseband processor or a CPU.
  • the baseband processor and the CPU may be integrated or separated.
  • the processor 1611 may be used to implement various functions for the terminal, for example, to process communication protocols and communication data, or to control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process data of the software program; or to assist completion Calculation processing tasks, such as graphics and image processing or audio processing; or the processor 1211 is used to implement one or more of the above functions
  • the output device 1614 communicates with the processor 1611 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 1214 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector. Wait.
  • the input device 1615 communicates with the processor 1611 and can accept user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 1615 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensing device.
  • the access network device may implement the method performed by the terminal 21 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first configuration information of the first bearer and the first configuration of the first bearer may be received from the MN01 through the antenna 1616.
  • Second configuration information For other steps implemented by the terminal through its components, reference may be made to the method performed by the terminal 21 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 17 it is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1700 includes a processor 1701, a communication interface 1702, and the processor 1701 is connected to the communication interface 1702.
  • the communication device 1700 may further include a memory 1703, and the memory 1703 is connected to the processor 1701 and the communication interface 1702.
  • the processor 1701 may include at least one of the following types: a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, and an application-specific integrated circuit (Application-Specific Integrated Circuit) Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), microcontroller (MCU), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or integrated circuit for implementing logic operations.
  • the processor 1711 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor.
  • the at least one processor 1711 may be integrated in one chip or located on multiple different chips.
  • the memory 1703 may include at least one of the following types: read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or Other types of dynamic storage devices that store information and instructions can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memories (EEPROMs).
  • the memory can also be a compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other disc storage, disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.) , Magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the communication interface 1702 may have a transmitting and receiving function, and is configured to communicate with other communication devices or other devices in the communication device.
  • the memory 1703 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 1701 through a communication bus.
  • the memory 1703 may also be integrated with the processor 1701.
  • the device 1700 may be a MN (e.g. MN01), a chip in MN (e.g. MN01), a SN (e.g. SN11), a chip in SN (e.g. SN11), a CU (e.g. CU0111 or CU1111), a CU (e.g. CU0111 or CU1111) Chip, DU (such as DU0121 or DU1121).
  • MN e.g. MN01
  • a chip in MN e.g. MN01
  • SN e.g. SN11
  • a chip in SN e.g. SN11
  • a CU e.g. CU0111 or CU1111
  • CU e.g. CU0111 or CU1111
  • DU such as DU0121 or DU1121
  • the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may read the method instructions and data in the memory 1703 and run , So as to implement the method executed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface 1703 may include interfaces with other access network devices, such as an interface with SN11, and the communication interface may further include an antenna and a transceiver, such as the antenna 1515 and the transceiver 1513 in FIG. 15
  • the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit, and the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
  • the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may read the method instructions and data in the memory 1703 and run , So as to implement the method executed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface 1703 may include interfaces with other access network devices, such as an interface with MN01, and the communication interface may further include an antenna and a transceiver, such as the antenna 1515 and the transceiver 1513 in FIG. 15
  • the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit, and the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
  • the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by CU0111 (or CU1111) in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may The method instructions and data in the memory 1703 are read and run, thereby implementing the method executed by CU0111 (or CU1111) in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface 1703 may include an interface with DU0121 (or DU1121), and may also include an interface with CU1111 (or CU0111); when the device 1700 is CU0111 (or CU1111)
  • the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.
  • the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
  • the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by DU0121 (or DU1121) in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may The method instructions and data in the memory 1703 are read and run, thereby implementing the method executed by DU0121 (or DU1121) in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface 1703 may include an interface with CU0111 (or CU1111), and may further include a transceiver and an antenna.
  • the transceiver and the antenna may be used to send to or from the terminal 21 Receive data, such as the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer; when the device 1700 is a chip in CU0111 (or CU1111), the communication reception 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit Etc., the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
  • Receive data such as the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer
  • the communication reception 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit Etc.
  • the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the methods described in the foregoing method embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium.
  • Computer-readable media can include computer storage media and communication media, and can also include any medium that can transfer computer programs from one place to another.
  • a storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the computer-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or with instructions or data structures
  • the required program code is stored in a form and can be accessed by a computer.
  • any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic Cable, twisted pair, DSL or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio and microwave are included in the definition of the medium.
  • Magnetic disks and optical discs as used herein include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), floppy discs, and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, and optical discs use lasers to reproduce data optically. Combinations of the foregoing should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the methods described in the foregoing method embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the procedures or functions described in the foregoing method embodiments are generated.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or another programmable device.
  • Figure 18-20 below introduces a scheme for changing the length of PDCP and SN.
  • MN01 can assign a new bearer identifier to the bearer, and then MN01 and SN11 generate the old bearer identifier of the bearer.
  • the release configuration information of the corresponding entity and the added configuration information of the entity corresponding to the new bearer identifier of the bearer the terminal 21 executes the release of the entity corresponding to the old bearer identifier of the bearer and the entity corresponding to the new bearer identifier of the bearer. increase.
  • the method is described below from the perspective of the primary node and the secondary node.
  • the following M1 method can be executed by a master node or a chip in the master node.
  • the M1 method includes:
  • M101 Obtain the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be generated or determined by the master node, or the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be received from the secondary node.
  • M102 When the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer, determine the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the length of the first bearer stored by the master node before the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is obtained.
  • the second bearer identifier of the first bearer is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be the bearer identifier of the first bearer when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length.
  • the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be the bearer identifier of the first bearer stored by the master node.
  • M103 Send the second bearer identifier of the first bearer to the secondary node.
  • the method may further include M104-M106.
  • M104 Receive the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer from the secondary node.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include increased configuration information of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • M105 Generate master node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include added configuration information of entities on the master node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the entity on the master node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • M106 Send the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer and the primary node configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal.
  • the following M2 method can be executed by a secondary node or a chip in the secondary node.
  • M201 Determine the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • M201 is optional.
  • M202 Receive the second bearer identifier of the first bearer from the master node.
  • M203 Send the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer to the primary node.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include increased configuration information of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing a PDCP SN length, where an EN-DC scenario is taken as an example.
  • S1801 MN01 sends a first request message to SN11.
  • the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message or a first secondary node modification request message.
  • the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer may be an MCG bearer terminated by the MN, and MN01 may decide to add a secondary node.
  • the first bearer can be terminated at the SN after adding the secondary node, that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is SN terminated MCG Bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first request message may be a first secondary node modification request message, and the first secondary node modification request message may indicate a modification of the bearer type of the first bearer.
  • the bearer of the first bearer is modified.
  • the type can be terminated at the MN or SN.
  • MN01 can decide to modify the bearer type of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer can be terminated at the SN, that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is at SN11.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the first request message may include:
  • This interface is the interface between MN01 and SN11.
  • the ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 is used to identify the terminal 21 on the interface between the MN01 and the SN11.
  • the interface between MN01 and SN11 is an X2 interface
  • the ID assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 at the interface is an X2 application protocol (AP) ID.
  • AP application protocol
  • the interface between MN01 and SN11 is the Xn interface, and MN01 is the terminal 21
  • the ID assigned on the interface is XnAP ID.
  • the core network element 31 is 5GC, MN01 is gNB, and SN11 is gNB.
  • the core network element 31 is 5GC.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved universal terrestrial radio access network
  • E-UTRAN Evolved universal terrestrial radio access network
  • E-RAB radio access bearer
  • it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • MCG resources exist in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and there is no SCG resource, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is the SN terminated MCG bearer.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11.
  • the first bearer after adding the secondary node has MCG resources and SCG resources, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated split bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer is the configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the MN terminated MCG.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified may be used to assist the SN11 in generating the configuration information of the new PDCP entity.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer before modifying the bearer type may include the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits, and the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first before adding SN11. PDCP SN length of the bearer.
  • the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may include one or two of the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the first PDCP of the first bearer.
  • the SN length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the first PDCP SN of the first bearer
  • the length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before SN11 is increased; the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before SN11 is increased.
  • the first secondary node addition request message may refer to the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Technical Specification (TS) 36.423 V15 .1.0 Section 9.1.4.1 related to the "auxiliary gNB addition request" ("SGNB ADDITION REQUEST"), for example, the above information (2) (3) can be obtained through “SGNB ADDITION REQUEST" "to be added E- The cell “E-RAB Item” and the cell “Data Radio Bearer ID” ("DRB ID”) in the "RAB Item” (“E-RABs”) are carried.
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • TS Technical Specification
  • the first secondary node modification request message can refer to the relevant content of "SGNB Modification Certificate” in section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0, for example, the above Information (2) (3) can be carried by the cell "E-RAB ID” and the cell “DRB ID” in the "E-RABs To Be Added Item" in the "SGNB Modification Request".
  • the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after adding SN11.
  • the secondary node addition request message may indicate that the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding SN11 is on SN11, and SN11 may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message may indicate that the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11 after modifying the bearer type, and SN11 may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer may be different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer.
  • the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer may be 18 bits.
  • the second PDCP SN length may include one or two of the second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. It may be the second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or, the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be The length of the second uplink PDCP SN of the first bearer and the length of the second downlink PDCP SN of the first bearer.
  • the second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before the bearer is modified; the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified.
  • the length of the second PDCP SN is different from the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that the length of the second uplink PDCP SN is different from the length of the first uplink PDCP SN, or the length of the second downlink PDCP The length of the first downlink PDCP SN is different.
  • the first request corresponding message may be a secondary node addition request response message or a secondary node modification request response message.
  • the first request response message is the first secondary node addition request response message; when the first request message is the first secondary node modification request message, the first request The response message is a first secondary node modification request response message.
  • the first request response message may include:
  • the interface is an interface between MN01 and SN11.
  • the ID on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 is used to identify the terminal 21 on the interface between the SN11 and the MN01.
  • the interface between MN01 and SN11 is the X2 interface
  • the ID on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 is X2AP ID.
  • the interface between MN01 and SN11 is an Xn interface
  • the ID on the interface assigned by SN11 to terminal 21 is XnAPID.
  • E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request message in S1801 may refer to the related content of the E-RAB identifier in S1801.
  • SN11 may not generate the first The configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the bearer identifier, the first response message may not include the configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, and wait until the first After the second bearer identifier, the configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 is delivered, which can save communication resources.
  • S1804: MN01 sends a second request message to SN11.
  • the second request message may be a second secondary node addition request message or a second secondary node modification request message.
  • the second request message may be a request message for a second secondary node or a second secondary node modification request message.
  • the second request message may be the second secondary node modification request message.
  • MN01 can obtain the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and MN01 can compare the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer with the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. When different, it indicates that SN11 changed the PDCP SN length of the first bearer. MN01 can provide the second bearer identifier for the first bearer and send it to SN11 for SN11 to perform the release and increase of the bearer first. The second bearer identifier is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the second request message may include:
  • E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request message in S1801 It may be the same as the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request message in S1801, and the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request response message in S1803.
  • the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer correspond to the same E-RAB identifier.
  • the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message
  • a second bearer identifier of the first bearer is indicated.
  • the cell “DRB ID” can be added to the "E-RAB item to be modified" ("E-RABs To Be Modified Item") in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST” section of 9.1.4.5 in 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0. ",
  • the specific cell structure can be shown in Table 1 below:
  • the second request message may further include first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that a bearer identifier of the first bearer is changed.
  • the first indication information may indicate that the second request message is related to the first request message, and where the second request message is related to the first request message, it can be understood that the second request message changes the first request.
  • the bearer identifier in the message, or the second request message is a continuation of the first request message.
  • the first indication information may indicate that the second request message is related to the first request response message.
  • the second request message is related to the first request response message. It can be understood that the second request message is based on the first request message. A request response message is generated, or the second request message is a response to the first request response message.
  • the first indication information may instruct the SN11 to generate configuration information based on the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. For example, when the second request message is a second secondary node modification request message, the SN11 is required to generate a complete set of configurations.
  • the first indication information can be used to instruct the SN11 to generate a full configuration, instead of based on the configuration generated in S1803. Make a delta configuration.
  • the first indication information may be carried by an existing cell, and the existing cell may be used by the MN01 to request the latest configuration on the SN11 from the SN11.
  • the meaning of the cell may be extended.
  • the SN11 After receiving the second bearer identifier and the first indication information of the first bearer, the SN11 may generate a complete configuration for the terminal 21.
  • the existing cell may be the cell "SCG Configuration Query" in 39.2 TS36.423 V15.1.0 section 9.2.103.
  • a new cell may be defined, and the first indication information may be carried by a new cell, and the new cell is used to instruct the SN 11 to generate a complete configuration for the terminal 21.
  • the first indication information may specifically include one or two of the ID of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, or may be Others are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • MN01 and SN11 may negotiate the first indication when the second request message includes one or two of the ID of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 for the terminal 21 and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the information may indicate the contents of the various optional embodiments described above.
  • the second request message is the second secondary node addition request message
  • by carrying the first instruction information in the second secondary node addition request message it is possible to avoid SN11 after receiving the second secondary node addition request message due to the second secondary node
  • the node addition request message is the same as the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first secondary node addition request message, and SN11 treats the second secondary node addition request message as an abnormal message without processing.
  • the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message
  • by carrying the first indication information in the second secondary node modification request message it can be avoided that SN11 considers the second secondary node to receive the second secondary node modification request message after receiving the second secondary node modification request message.
  • the node modification request message is used to modify the identity of the first bearer, so as to modify only the bearer identity of the first bearer, for example, from the first bearer identity to the second bearer identity.
  • the second request message may not include the first indication information, for example, the first request response message in S1803 does not include the configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, indicating that SN11 has determined that the occurrence
  • the first request response message in S1803 does not include the configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, indicating that SN11 has determined that the occurrence
  • SN11 knows that a complete set of configuration needs to be generated at this time, and no additional instructions are required.
  • the following describes, with reference to S1805-S1807, MN01 and SN11 for the terminal 21 to generate the release configuration information of the entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • S1805: SN11 generates secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the SN11 After receiving the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, the SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer includes configuration information released by the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and configuration information added by the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the first bearer identifier Release of the corresponding PDCP entity and configuration information added by the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may further include added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and optionally, it may further include configuration information of the logical entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer is It may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier. Added configuration information for the MAC entity.
  • the configuration information of the secondary bearer of the first bearer may further include the configuration information of the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated split bearer.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. It may include the release configuration of the PDCP entity and RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the addition configuration of the PDCP entity and RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, it may also include the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier Increased configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the second request response message may include secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the second request response message may be a second secondary node addition request response message or a second secondary node modification request response message.
  • the second request response message adds a request response message to the second secondary node; when the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, the second request The response message is a modification request response message for the second secondary node.
  • S1807: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the increase configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier may also be included.
  • the first bearer type is an MN terminated MCG bearer or the MN terminated SPLIT bearer.
  • the first bearer type is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated SPLIT bearer.
  • the master node configuration information of the bearer may include configuration information of release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the increase configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier may also be included.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the release configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier may also be included.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN or the SPLIT bearer of the MN terminates.
  • the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer.
  • the master node configuration information of the first bearer It may include release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and release configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
  • S1808: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, the primary node configuration information of the first bearer, and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • S1811 The terminal 21 and the SN11 complete random access.
  • Figure 18 uses the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 18 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 18.
  • the E-RAB identifier may not be carried or may be replaced with the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message or a first secondary node modification request message.
  • the first request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and may carry the first bearer of the first bearer in S1801. logo.
  • the first request response message may be a first secondary node addition request response message or a first secondary node modification request response message, and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be used instead of the E-RAB identifier.
  • the first request The response message may not carry the E-RAB identifier and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the second request message when the second request message is an additional request message for the second secondary node, the second request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer in S1804.
  • Bearer identifier when the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, the second secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier in S1804.
  • the second bearer identifier may refer to Table 1.
  • the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may be carried by the cell "DRB ID" of Table 1.
  • the second request message carries the first bearer identifier and the corresponding first
  • the second bearer identification information is used to instruct the SN11 to change the bearer identification, that is, to replace the first bearer identification with the second bearer identification.
  • MN01 and SN11 can learn that the second bearer identifier corresponds to the first bearer identifier.
  • the bearer that is, the bearer identifier of the first bearer has changed.
  • the second bearer identifier of the first bearer can be carried in S1803, without the need to carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the second request message After receiving the second request message, it is determined that the second request message includes the bearer identifier of the first bearer, for example, the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • SN11 After receiving the second request message, SN11 may use the new bearer identifier to generate the first bearer identifier.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of a bearer for example, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer is used to generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the variable PDCP SN length.
  • the first bearer ends at MN01 before and after the bearer type is modified; in addition, the first bearer is established at MN01 and SN11 before and after the bearer type is modified.
  • S1901: MN01 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer ends at MN01 before and after the bearer type is modified.
  • MN01 can determine the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified.
  • the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is called the second PDCP SN length
  • the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is called the first PDCP SN length.
  • the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be an uplink PDCP SN length and / or a downlink PDCP SN length.
  • MN01 can regenerate a bearer identifier for the first bearer.
  • the bearer identifier of the first bearer with the modified bearer type is referred to as the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the bearer identifier of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is referred to as the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message may include the ID on the interface allocated by the MN01 to the terminal 21, the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message may further include a second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the bearer modification list in the secondary node modification request message may indicate the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the cell “DRB ID” can be added to the "E-RABs To Be Modified Item” in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST” section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0.
  • the specific cell structure can be as shown in Table 1 above. As shown.
  • the bearer modification list in the secondary node modification request message does not carry the identifier of the bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message carries the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, so that SN11 can learn that MN01 has been modified.
  • the length of the PDCP and SN of the bearer needs to regenerate the configuration information of the bearer secondary node.
  • MN01 and SN11 generate configuration information of the first bearer.
  • MN01 and SN11 generate, for the terminal 21, configuration information of release of an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • SN11 After SN11 receives the second bearer identifier of the first bearer in S1903, it can obtain the first bearer identifier of the first bearer through the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer. For example, SN11 stores the E-RAB identifier and the corresponding first bearer identifier. The first bearer identifier of the bearer; then SN11 can compare the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. When the first bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer are different, it means that MN01 is again The bearer is assigned a bearer identifier, and the SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and increased configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified
  • the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified
  • the first bearer is the SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified
  • the bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the logical channel, and the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Added configuration information for logical channels.
  • S1904 SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
  • the secondary node modification request response message includes the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S1905: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may further include the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • it may further include added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may further include release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier, and optionally, may also include configuration information of release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
  • the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified
  • the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified.
  • the master node configuration information of the first bearer may include a PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
  • the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified
  • the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified.
  • the master node configuration information of the first bearer may include a PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a second bearer identifier of the first bearer, secondary node configuration information of the first bearer, and master node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • S1908: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation (SN) confirmation message to SN11.
  • SN secondary node modification confirmation
  • Figure 19 takes the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 19 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 19.
  • the E-RAB identifier may be replaced with the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and may carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • SN11 can judge the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. When the first bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer are different, it means that MN01 has reassigned the bearer. Bearer ID. SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing the length of a PDCP SN, where an EN-DC scenario is taken as an example.
  • S2001: SN11 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer ends at SN11.
  • SN11 may decide to change the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, for example, change the PDCP length of the first bearer from the first PDCP SN length to the second PDCP SN length.
  • the first PDCP SN length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length and / or the first downlink PDCP SN length
  • the second PDCP SN length may be the second uplink PDCP SN length and / or the second downlink PDCP SN length. Please refer to the related content in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19.
  • the secondary node modification request message includes the ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 for the terminal 21, the ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the SN11 for the terminal 21, the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and the second PDCP of the first bearer SN length.
  • MN01 After receiving the modification request message of the secondary node, MN01 can obtain the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer through the E-RAB ID of the first bearer. When the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the second bearer of the first bearer, When the length of the PDCP is SN, MN01 can determine the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. The second bearer identifier of the first bearer is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. The first bearer identifier of the first bearer is that MN01 receives the secondary node. Before modifying the application message, the bearer identifier of the first bearer, for example, MN01 can save the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • S2003: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
  • the secondary node modification request message may include an E-RAB identifier and a second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the bearer modification list in the second secondary node modification request message may indicate the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the cell “DRB ID” can be added to the "E-RABs To Be Modified Item” in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST” section of Section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0.
  • the specific cell structure can be as shown in Table 1 above. As shown.
  • S2004: SN11 generates secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include release information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include release information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may also be included.
  • the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the release of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer of the first bearer. Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  • the first bearer is a SPLIT bearer terminated by SN before and after the SN length changes.
  • the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the release configuration of the PDCP entity and the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the information and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may optionally include configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the first Added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the bearer
  • S2005: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
  • the secondary node modification request response message may include secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • S2006: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may also be included.
  • the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer or an SN-terminated SPLIT bearer before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
  • the master node configuration information of the first bearer may include the release of the RLC entity and the corresponding second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the added configuration information of the RLC entity may optionally include configuration information of release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. .
  • S2007: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
  • the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
  • S2009: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation message to SN11.
  • Figure 20 uses the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 20 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 20.
  • the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, that is, the secondary node modification request message may carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and The second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
  • MN01 may have functional units corresponding to the MN01 method or process steps, and SN11 may exist with SN11. Functional units corresponding to steps of a method or process.
  • the actions performed by MN01 in the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be implemented by the communication device provided in FIG. 6a, FIG. 15 or FIG. 17;
  • the actions performed by the SN11 may be implemented by the structure of the SN11 provided in FIG. 6b, FIG. 16 or FIG.
  • the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be implemented by using a computer-readable storage medium and a computer program product.
  • a computer-readable storage medium and a computer program product For details, refer to the related content of the embodiments of the present application regarding the computer-readable storage medium and the computer program product.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device including a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device M1 method, M2 method, FIG. 18 -The method performed by MN01 in FIG. 20.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device including a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device M1 method, M2 method, FIG. 18 -The method performed by SN11 in FIG. 20.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program of the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods of MN01 or SN11 in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product.
  • the program product includes a program.
  • the program is executed, the M1 method, the M2 method, and the MN01 or SN11 method in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 are executed.
  • the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be cross-referenced and cited with the content of the rest of the embodiments of the present application.

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method, device and system in multi-RAT dual connectivity. According to the method, when a PDCP SN length of a bearer is changed, an SN sends a PDCP SN length change indication to an MN, so that the MN and the SN can generate a bearer release and added configuration information for a terminal, thereby completing the change of the PDCP SN length.

Description

一种多制式双连接中的通信方法和通信装置Communication method and communication device in multi-standard dual connection
本申请要求于2018年6月22日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201810653785.0、申请名称为“一种多制式双连接中的通信方法和通信装置”,以及于2018年11月02日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201811302962.7、申请名称为“一种多制式双连接中的通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application is required to be submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on June 22, 2018, with an application number of 201810653785.0, and the application name is "a communication method and communication device in a multi-standard dual connection", and it shall be submitted on November 02, 2018 The priority of the Chinese patent application of the State Intellectual Property Office of the People's Republic of China, application number 201811302962.7, and application name "A communication method and communication device in a multi-standard dual connection", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种多制式双连接中的通信方法和装置。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device in a multi-standard dual connection.
背景技术Background technique
为了提高数据传输的吞吐量,引入了支持不同接入技术的双连接。例如:多制式双连接(Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity,MR-DC)。In order to improve the throughput of data transmission, dual connections supporting different access technologies are introduced. For example: Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC).
图1为一种双连接的通信系统示意图。如图1所示,终端21可以同时与主节点(master node,MN)01和辅节点(secondary node,SN)11进行通信,MN01和SN11可以相连,主节点A和辅节点B均可以与核心网网元31相连。MN01和SN11采用的接入技术可以不同。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connection communication system. As shown in FIG. 1, the terminal 21 can communicate with the master node (MN) 01 and the secondary node (SN) 11 at the same time, MN01 and SN11 can be connected, and both the primary node A and the secondary node B can communicate with the core. The network element 31 is connected. MN01 and SN11 can use different access technologies.
MR-DC具体可以包括如下场景:MR-DC can include the following scenarios:
1、演进的通用陆基无线接入(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access,E-UTRA)及新空口(New Radio,NR)的双连接(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity,EN-DC)1. E-UTRA-NR Dual-Connectivity (EN-DC) for Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and New Radio (NR)
如图2所示,核心网网元31是演进型分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC),MN01为演进型节点(evolved universal terrestrial radio access network NodeB,eNB),SN11为新空口节点(new radio nodeB,gNB)。As shown in Figure 2, core network element 31 is an evolved packet core (EPC), MN01 is an evolved node (evolved universal terrestrial radio access network NodeB, eNB), and SN11 is a new air interface node (new radio node) nodeB, gNB).
MN01和SN11可以通过X2接口相连,MN01和SN11之间可以有用户面连接;MN01与核心网网元31可以通过S1接口相连,MN01与核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接;SN11与核心网网元31可以通过S1-U接口相连,SN11核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接。MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the X2 interface, MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the user plane; MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the S1 interface, MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the user plane; SN11 and The core network element 31 may be connected through an S1-U interface, and the SN11 core network element 31 may have a user plane connection.
2、下一代(Next Generation,NG)无线接入网络(Radio Access Network,RAN)E-UTRA及NR的双连接(NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity,NGEN-DC)2. Next Generation (NG) Radio Access Network (RAN) E-UTRA and NR Dual Connectivity (NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity, NGEN-DC)
如图3所示,核心网网元31是第五代(5G,5th Generation)核心网(5G core,5GC),MN01是eNB,SN11是gNB。As shown in FIG. 3, the core network element 31 is a fifth generation (5G, 5th Generation) core network (5G, 5GC), MN01 is an eNB, and SN11 is a gNB.
MN01和SN11可以通过Xn接口相连,MN01和SN11之间可以有用户面连接;MN01与核心网网元31可以通过NG接口相连,MN01与核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接;SN11与核心网网元31可以通过NG-U接口相连,SN11核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接。MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the Xn interface, MN01 and SN11 can be connected through the user plane; MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the NG interface, MN01 and the core network element 31 can be connected through the user plane; SN11 and The core network element 31 may be connected through an NG-U interface, and the SN11 core network element 31 may have a user plane connection.
3、NR及E-UTRA的双连接(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity,NG-DC)3. Dual connection of NR and E-UTRA (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity, NG-DC)
如图4所示,核心网网元31是5GC,MN01是gNB,SN11是eNB。As shown in FIG. 4, the core network element 31 is 5GC, MN01 is gNB, and SN11 is eNB.
MN01和SN11可以相连,例如通过Xn接口,MN01和SN11之间可以有用户面连接;MN01与核心网网元31可以相连,例如通过NG接口,MN01与核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接;SN11与核心网网元31可以相连,例如通过NG-U接口,SN11核心网网元31之间可以有用户面连接。MN01 and SN11 can be connected. For example, through the Xn interface, there can be a user plane connection between MN01 and SN11; MN01 can be connected with the core network element 31. For example, through the NG interface, MN01 and the core network element 31 can have a user plane. Connection; SN11 and core network element 31 can be connected, for example, through the NG-U interface, there can be a user plane connection between SN11 core network element 31.
在上述每种场景下,从MN01和SN11的角度,用户面可以有如下6种类型的承载,如图5所示,下面以下行为例分别介绍了每种承载类型的数据流向,本领域技术人员可以理解的是,上行与下行类似,在此不再赘述。In each of the above scenarios, from the perspective of MN01 and SN11, the user plane can have the following six types of bearers, as shown in Figure 5. The following behavior examples introduce the data flow of each bearer type. Those skilled in the art It can be understood that the uplink is similar to the downlink, and is not repeated here.
1、MN终结的主小区组(Master Cell Group,MCG)承载。1. The MN terminated Master Cell Group (MCG) bearer.
数据从核心网网元31下发至MN01,依次经过MN01的分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)、无线链路层控制协议(Radio Link Control,RLC)层和媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层发送至终端21。Data is sent from the core network element 31 to MN01, which in turn passes the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), radio link layer control protocol (Radio Link Control, RLC) layer and media access control (Media) of MN01. The Access Control (MAC) layer is sent to the terminal 21.
2、MN终结的辅小区组(Secondary Cell Group,SCG)承载。2. Secondary cell group (SCG) bearer terminated by MN.
数据从核心网网元31下发至MN01,经过MN01的PDCP层发送至SN11的RLC层,依次经过SN11的RLC层和MAC层发送至终端21。The data is sent from the core network element 31 to MN01, and then sent to the RLC layer of SN11 via the PDCP layer of MN01, and then to the terminal 21 via the RLC layer and MAC layer of SN11.
3、MN终结的分流(Split)承载。3. MN terminated split bearer.
数据从核心网网元31下发至MN01,MN101的PDCP层对数据进行分流,一部分数据依次经过MN01的RLC实体和MAC实体发送至终端21,另一部分数据发送至SN11的RLC层,依次经过SN11的RLC层和MAC层发送至终端21。The data is sent from the core network element 31 to MN01, and the PDCP layer of MN101 splits the data. Part of the data is sent to the terminal 21 through the RLC and MAC entities of MN01 in turn, and the other part of the data is sent to the RLC layer of SN11 and then SN11 The RLC layer and the MAC layer are sent to the terminal 21.
4、SN终结的Split承载。4. Split bearer terminated by SN.
数据从核心网网元31下发至SN11,SN11的PDCP层对数据进行分流,一部分数据依次经过SN11的RLC实体和MAC实体发送至终端21,另一部分数据发送至MN101的RLC层,依次经过MN101的RLC层和MAC层发送至终端21。The data is sent from the core network element 31 to SN11. The PDCP layer of SN11 splits the data. Part of the data is sent to the terminal 21 through the RLC and MAC entities of SN11 in turn, and the other part of the data is sent to the RLC layer of MN101 and then MN101 The RLC layer and the MAC layer are sent to the terminal 21.
5、SN终结的MCG承载。5. MCG bearer terminated by SN.
数据从核心网网元31下发至SN11,经过SN11的PDCP层发送至MN01的RLC层,依次经过MN01的RLC层和MAC层发送至终端21。Data is sent from the core network element 31 to SN11, and then sent to the RLC layer of MN01 via the PDCP layer of SN11, and then sent to the terminal 21 via the RLC layer and MAC layer of MN01.
6、SN终结的SCG承载。6. SN terminated SCG bearer.
数据从核心网网元31下发至SN11,依次经过SN11的PDCP层、RLC层和MAC层发送至终端21。The data is sent from the core network element 31 to the SN11, and then sent to the terminal 21 through the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, and the MAC layer of the SN11 in order.
上述MCG承载涉及MCG空口资源,SCG承载涉及SCG空口资源,Split承载涉及MCG空口资源和SCG空口资源。The above MCG bearer relates to MCG air interface resources, the SCG bearer relates to SCG air interface resources, and the split bearer relates to MCG air interface resources and SCG air interface resources.
上述终结于MN的承载的PDCP实体在MN上,终结于SN的承载的PDCP实体在SN上。终结于MN的承载的PDCP实体和终结于SN的承载的PDCP实体均可以配置为NR PDCP实体。NR PDCP实体可以为每个PDCP包加上一个PDCP序列号(sequence number,SN),用于终端21接收到多个PDCP包后,根据PDCP SN对该多个PDCP包进行排序。PDCP SN的长度可以有多种可能,例如可以为12位(bit)或者18bit,应该如何进行承载的PDCP SN长度变更是一个亟待解决的问题。The PDCP entity of the bearer terminating in the MN is on the MN, and the PDCP entity of the bearer terminating in the SN is on the SN. Both the PDCP entity terminated in the MN and the PDCP entity terminated in the SN can be configured as NR PDCP entities. The NR PDCP entity may add a PDCP sequence number (SN) to each PDCP packet, and is used by the terminal 21 to sort the multiple PDCP packets according to the PDCP SN after receiving multiple PDCP packets. The length of the PDCP SN can have multiple possibilities. For example, the length of the PDCP SN can be 12 bits or 18 bits. How to change the PDCP SN length of the bearer is an urgent problem.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请实施例提供了一种多制式双连接中的通信方法、装置和系统,可以进行承 载的PDCP SN长度变更。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and system in a multi-standard dual connection, which can change the length of the PDCP that is carried.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种多制式双连接中的通信方法。该方法可以应用于辅节点或者辅节点中的芯片。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection. The method can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in a secondary node.
该方法可以包括:生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度配置,该第一承载的该第二PDCP SN长度配置可以指示该第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度;当该第一承载的该第二PDCP SN长度不同于该第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,生成该第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示;向MN发送该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示;其中,该第一PDCP SN长度为该第一承载的PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度之前的PDCP SN长度。The method may include generating a second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer may indicate a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer; when the first PD When the PDCP SN length is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is generated; the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is sent to the MN; wherein, the first The PDCP SN length is the PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the PDCP SN length before the second PDCP SN length.
通过辅节点向主节点发送PDCP SN长度变更指示,可以使得主节点获知PDCP SN长度发生变化,辅节点和主节点可以为终端生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息,从而完成PDCP SN长度变更。The secondary node sends a PDCP SN length change instruction to the primary node, so that the primary node can learn that the PDCP SN length has changed, and the secondary node and the primary node can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
可选的,该方法中,在该第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,该第一承载终结于SN。Optionally, in this method, when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, the first bearer terminates at the SN.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型与该第一承载在PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型相同。Optionally, in this method, the bearer type of the first bearer in the PDCP SN length to the first PDCP SN length is the same as the bearer type of the first bearer in the PDCP SN length to the second PDCP SN length.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型与该第一承载在PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型不同。Optionally, in this method, the bearer type of the first bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP and SN length is different from the bearer type of the first bearer with a PDCP SN length of the second PDCP and SN length.
可选的,该方法中,其特征在于,该SN向MN发送该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,包括:Optionally, the method is characterized in that the SN sends the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN, including:
SN向MN发送辅节点修改申请消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息,该辅节点修改申请消息包括该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示。The SN sends a secondary node modification request message or a secondary node modification request response message to the MN, and the secondary node modification request message includes the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
可选的,该方法还包括:SN生成该第一承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该第一承载的该第一配置信息。该第一承载的该第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; and the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN. The first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的该第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
可选的,该方法中,在辅节点SN生成该第一承载的该第二PDCP SN长度配置之前,该第一承载终结于MN;该方法还包括:SN从MN接收第一PDCP SN长度配置,该第一PDCP SN长度配置用于指示该第一PDCP SN长度。Optionally, in the method, before the secondary node SN generates the second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer, the first bearer terminates at the MN; the method further includes: the SN receives the first PDCP SN length configuration from the MN The first PDCP SN length is configured to indicate the first PDCP SN length.
可选的,该方法中,该SN向MN发送该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,包括:向MN发送辅节点修改申请消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息,该辅节点修改申请消息或者该辅节点修改请求响应消息包括该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示。Optionally, in the method, the SN sends the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN, including: sending a secondary node modification request message or a secondary node modification request response message to the MN, the secondary node modification request message, or The secondary node modification request response message includes an indication of the PDCP SN length change of the first bearer.
可选的,该方法中,当该第一承载的PDCP SN长度为该第一PDCP SN长度时,该第一承载为MN终结的MCG承载;该SN向MN发送该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,包括:SN向MN发送辅节点增加请求响应消息,该辅节点增加请求响应消息包括该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示。Optionally, in the method, when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP SN, the first bearer is an MCG bearer terminated by the MN; the SN sends the PDCP SN of the first bearer to the MN The length change indication includes: the SN sends a secondary node increase request response message to the MN, and the secondary node increase request response message includes the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
可选的,该方法还包括:SN生成该第一承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该 第一承载的该第一配置信息;该第一承载的该第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the first bearer includes a PDCP entity Added configuration information.
可选的,该方法还包括:SN生成该第一承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该第一承载的该第一配置信息;该第一承载的该第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的删除和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the first bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the first bearer includes a PDCP entity Deleted and added configuration information.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的该第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种多制式双连接中的通信方法。该方法可以应用于辅节点或者辅节点中的芯片。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection. The method can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in a secondary node.
该方法包括:从MN接收第二承载的第二PDCP SN长度;在从MN接收该第二承载的该第二PDCP SN长度之前,该第二承载的PDCP长度为第一PDCP SN长度;当该第二承载的该第二PDCP SN长度不同于该第二承载的该第一PDCP SN长度时,确定该第二承载的PDCP SN长度发生变更。The method includes: receiving a second PDCP SN length of a second bearer from the MN; before receiving the second PDCP SN length of the second bearer from the MN, the PDCP length of the second bearer is the first PDCP SN length; when the When the length of the second PDCP SN of the second bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the second bearer, it is determined that the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is changed.
通过MN将第二PDCP SN长度发给SN,SN可以保存第二PDCP SN长度,SN可以自主判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化,当PDCP SN长度不仅仅可以是12bit、18bit的时候,PDCP SN长度变化可以存在很多可能性,SN均可以判断得知PDCP SN长度是否发生了变化,从而SN可以为终端生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息,以完成PDCP SN长度变更。The MN sends the second PDCP SN length to the SN. The SN can save the second PDCP SN length. The SN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed. When the PDCP SN length can be more than 12 bits and 18 bits, the PDCP SN length changes. There may be many possibilities, and the SN can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, so that the SN can generate the release and increase configuration information of the bearer for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第一PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于MN;该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于MN。Optionally, in the method, when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the first PDCP SN length, the second bearer ends at the MN; when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the second PDCP SN length, The second bearer ends at the MN.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型和该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型相同。Optionally, in this method, the type of the second bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP SN length and the type of the second bearer with the PDCP SN length of the second PDCP SN length are the same.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型和该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型不同。Optionally, in this method, the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the length of the first PDCP SN and the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the second PDCP SN length are different.
可选的,该方法还包括:生成该第二承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该第二承载的该第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating the first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes the release of the RLC entity And added configuration information.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第一PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于SN;该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于MN;该方法还包括:SN向MN发送该第一PDCP SN长度。Optionally, in the method, when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the first PDCP SN length, the second bearer terminates at the SN; when the second bearer has a PDCP SN length that is the second PDCP SN length, The second bearer ends at the MN; the method further includes: the SN sends the first PDCP SN length to the MN.
可选的,该方法还包括:SN生成该第二承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该第二承载的该第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the SN generates first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes a PDCP entity Released configuration information.
可选的,该方法中,其特征在于该第二承载的该第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method is characterized in that the first configuration information of the second bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:SN生成该第二承载的第一配置信息;SN向MN发送该第二承载的该第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the SN generates the first configuration information of the second bearer; the SN sends the first configuration information of the second bearer to the MN; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes the RLC entity Release and added configuration information.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种多制式双连接中的通信方法,可以应用于主节点或者主节点中的芯片。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-system dual connection, which can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node.
该方法包括:从SN接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示;保存该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示。The method includes: receiving a PDCP SN length change indication of a first bearer from an SN; and storing the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
通过主节点从辅节点接收PDCP SN长度变更指示,可以使得主节点获知PDCP SN长度发生变化,从而辅节点和主节点可以为终端生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息,从而完成PDCP SN长度变更。By receiving the PDCP SN length change instruction from the secondary node through the primary node, the primary node can be informed that the PDCP SN length has changed, so that the secondary node and the primary node can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal, thereby completing the PDCP SN length change.
可选的,该方法中,当该第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,该第一承载终结于SN。Optionally, in this method, before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the first bearer ends at the SN.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型和该第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型相同。Optionally, in this method, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length changes and the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length changes are the same.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型和该第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型不同。Optionally, in this method, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length changes and the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length changes are different.
可选的,该方法还包括:MN从SN接收第一承载的SN配置信息;MN向UE发送该第一承载的该SN配置信息。其中,该第一承载的第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the MN receives the SN configuration information of the first bearer from the SN; and the MN sends the SN configuration information of the first bearer to the UE. The first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的该第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:根据该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成该第一承载的第二配置信息;向终端发送该第一承载的该第二配置信息;该第一承载的该第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the first The second configuration information carried includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法中,当该第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,该第一承载终结于MN;Optionally, in the method, before the PDCP and SN lengths of the first bearer change, the first bearer ends at the MN;
该方法还包括:MN向SN发送该第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前的PDCP SN长度。The method further includes: the MN sends the PDCP SN length before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is changed to the SN.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:根据该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成该第一承载的第二配置信息;向终端发送该第一承载的该第二配置信息;该第一承载的第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the first The second configuration information carried includes release configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:MN根据该第一承载的该PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成该第一承载的第二配置信息;MN向终端发送该第一承载的该第二配置信息;该第一承载的第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the MN generates second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer; the MN sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal; the The second configuration information of the first bearer includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第一承载的第二配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the second configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种多制式双连接中的通信方法,可以应用于主节点或者主节点中的芯片。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method in a multi-standard dual connection, which can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node.
该方法包括:生成第二承载的第二PDCP SN长度;在生成该第二承载的该第二PDCP SN长度之前,该第二承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度;当该第二承载的该第二PDCP SN长度不同于该第二承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,确定该第二承载的PDCP SN长度发生变化。The method includes: generating a second PDCP SN length of the second bearer; before generating the second PDCP SN length of the second bearer, the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is the first PDCP SN length; when the second bearer When the second PDCP SN length is different from the first PDCP SN length of the second bearer, it is determined that the PDCP SN length of the second bearer is changed.
MN可以自主判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化,当PDCP SN长度不仅仅可以是12bit、18bit的时候,PDCP SN长度变化可以存在很多可能性,MN均可以判断得知PDCP SN长度是否发生了变化,从而MN可以为终端生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息,以完成PDCP SN长度变更。The MN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed. When the PDCP SN length is not only 12bit or 18bit, there can be many possibilities for the PDCP SN length change. The MN can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby The MN can generate the release of the bearer and the added configuration information for the terminal to complete the PDCP SN length change.
可选的,该方法中,在该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第一PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于MN。Optionally, in this method, when the length of the second bearer in the PDCP SN is the length of the first PDCP SN, the second bearer ends at the MN.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型和该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型相同。Optionally, in this method, the type of the second bearer with a PDCP SN length of the first PDCP SN length and the type of the second bearer with the PDCP SN length of the second PDCP SN length are the same.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度的承载类型和该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第二PDCP SN长度的承载类型不同。Optionally, in this method, the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the length of the first PDCP SN and the type of the second bearer whose PDCP SN length is the second PDCP SN length are different.
可选的,该方法还包括:从SN接收该第二承载的第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:生成该第二承载的第二配置信息;该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载的该第二配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the second configuration information of the second bearer further includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法中,在该第二承载在PDCP SN长度为该第一PDCP SN长度时,该第二承载终结于SN;该方法还包括:从SN接收该第一PDCP SN长度。SN可以将第一PDCP SN长度携带在MN可以读的信元中,MN可以读取第一PDCP SN长度,可选的,MN可以保存第一PDCP SN长度。通过SN将第一PDCP SN长度发给MN,MN读取第一PDCP SN长度,MN可以自主判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。Optionally, in the method, when the length of the second bearer in the PDCP SN is the length of the first PDCP SN, the second bearer terminates in the SN; the method further includes: receiving the first PDCP SN length from the SN. The SN may carry the first PDCP SN length in a cell that the MN can read, and the MN may read the first PDCP SN length. Optionally, the MN may save the first PDCP SN length. The first PDCP SN length is sent to the MN through the SN, the MN reads the first PDCP SN length, and the MN can autonomously determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
可选的,该方法还包括:从SN接收该第二承载的第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving the first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes the released configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:该第二承载的该第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:从SN接收该第二承载的第一配置信息;该第二承载的该第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving first configuration information of the second bearer from the SN; the first configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:生成该第二承载的第二配置信息;该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法还包括:生成该第二承载的第二配置信息;该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the method further includes: generating second configuration information of the second bearer; the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,该方法中,该第二承载的该第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的 配置信息。Optionally, in the method, the second configuration information of the second bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,可以应用于辅节点或者辅节点中的芯片。该通信装置包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得上述第一方面或者第二方面的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can be applied to a secondary node or a chip in the secondary node. The communication device includes a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the method of the first aspect or the second aspect described above.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,可以应用于主节点或者主节点中的芯片。该通信装置包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得上述第三方面或者第四方面的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can be applied to a master node or a chip in the master node. The communication device includes a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,存储有用于实现上述第一方面或者第二方面方法的程序。当所述程序在无线通信装置中运行时,使得所述无线通信装置执行上述第一方面或者第二方面的方法。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program for implementing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect. When the program runs in a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device is caused to execute the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,存储有用于实现上述第一方面或者第二方面方法的程序。当所述程序在无线通信装置中运行时,使得所述无线通信装置执行上述第三方面或者第四方面的方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program for implementing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect. When the program runs in a wireless communication device, the wireless communication device is caused to execute the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,该程序产品包括程序,当该程序被运行时,使得上述第一方面或者第二方面的方法被执行。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product. The program product includes a program that, when the program is executed, causes the foregoing method of the first aspect or the second aspect to be executed.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,该程序产品包括程序,当该程序被运行时,使得上述第三方面或者第四方面的方法被执行。According to a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product. The program product includes a program, and when the program is executed, the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect is executed.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本申请,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其它的附图。In order to explain the present application more clearly, the accompanying drawings used in the description of the embodiments are briefly introduced below. Obviously, the accompanying drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present invention. In terms of creative work, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings.
图1为一种双连接的通信系统示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a dual-connection communication system;
图2为一种EN-DC的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an EN-DC;
图3为一种NGEN-DC的示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a NGEN-DC;
图4为一种NG-DC的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an NG-DC;
图5是一种MR-DC中用户面承载类型的示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of a user plane bearer type in MR-DC;
图6a是一种MN01为CU-DU架构的示意图;FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture with MN01;
图6b是一种SN11为CU-DU架构的示意图;6b is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture with SN11;
图7为一种MN01和SN11均为CU-DU架构的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU architecture in which MN01 and SN11 are both;
图8为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length;
图9为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length;
图10为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
图11为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length;
图12a为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN;
图12b是改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;12b is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN;
图13是改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
图14是CU-DU架构下改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing a PDCP SN length under a CU-DU architecture; FIG.
图15为一种接入网设备的结构示意图;15 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device;
图16为一种终端的结构示意图;16 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal;
图17为一种装置1700的结构示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1700;
图18为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN;
图19为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length;
图20为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请中的附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行说明。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the present application.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以适用于如图1所示的通信系统。需要说明的是,图1所示的通信系统所包含的核心网网元、MN、SN和终端仅是一种示例,所述核心网网元与MN或者SN之间的连接关系也仅是一种示例,在本申请实施例中,所述通信系统包含的网元的类型、数量,以及网元之间的连接关系不限于此。The technical solution in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1. It should be noted that the core network element, MN, SN, and terminal included in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 are only examples, and the connection relationship between the core network element and the MN or SN is only one. For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the type and number of network elements included in the communication system, and the connection relationship between the network elements are not limited to this.
如图6a所示,当MN01是gNB时,MN01可以为集中式单元(Centralized Unit,CU)-分布式单元(Distributed Unit,DU)架构,MN01可以包括CU0111和DU0121,例如,在NG DC中,MN01是gNB,MN01可以为CU-DU架构,MN01可以包括CU0111和DU0121。CU0111和DU0121相连,例如通过F1接口,CU0111和核心网网元31相连,例如通过NG接口,图6a以1个CU0111和DU0121为例进行了说明,本申请实施例中,DU0121可以为多个,该多个DU0121可以共用一个CU0111,该多个DU0121均与CU0111相连,例如通过F1接口。As shown in FIG. 6a, when MN01 is a gNB, MN01 can be a Centralized Unit (CU) -Distributed Unit (DU) architecture, and MN01 can include CU0111 and DU0121. For example, in NG DC, MN01 is a gNB, MN01 can be a CU-DU architecture, and MN01 can include CU0111 and DU0121. CU0111 is connected to DU0121, for example, through the F1 interface, and CU0111 is connected to the core network element 31, for example, through the NG interface. Figure 6a illustrates one CU0111 and DU0121 as an example. In the embodiment of this application, there may be multiple DU0121 The multiple DU0121s can share one CU0111, and the multiple DU0121s are all connected to CU0111, for example, through an F1 interface.
如图6b所示,当SN11为gNB时,SN11可以为CU-DU架构,SN11可以包括CU1111和DU1121,例如,在EN-DC或者NGEN-DC中,SN11是gNB,SN11可以为CU-DU架构,SN11可以包括CU1111和DU1121。CU1111和DU1121相连,例如通过F1接口,CU1111和核心网网元31相连,例如通过NG接口,图6b以1个CU1111和DU1121为例进行了说明,本申请实施例中,DU1121可以为多个,该多个DU1121可以共用一个CU1111,该多个DU1121均与CU1111相连,例如通过F1接口。As shown in Figure 6b, when SN11 is a gNB, SN11 can be a CU-DU architecture, and SN11 can include CU1111 and DU1121. For example, in EN-DC or NGEN-DC, SN11 is a gNB and SN11 can be a CU-DU architecture. , SN11 can include CU1111 and DU1121. CU1111 and DU1121 are connected, for example, through the F1 interface, and CU1111 is connected to the core network element 31, for example, through the NG interface. Figure 6b illustrates one CU1111 and DU1121 as an example. In the embodiment of this application, there may be multiple DU1121. The multiple DU1121s can share one CU1111, and the multiple DU1121s are all connected to the CU1111, for example, through an F1 interface.
如图7所示,当MN01和SN11都是CU-DU架构时,CU0111和CU1111可以相连。As shown in Figure 7, when both MN01 and SN11 are CU-DU architectures, CU0111 and CU1111 can be connected.
CU-DU架构下,MN01的一部分功能部署在CU0111上,MN01的另一部分功能部署在DU0121,CU0111和DU0121的功能划分可以按照无线协议栈进行划分。其中一种可能的方式是将无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)、业务数据适应(Service Data Adaptation Protocol,SDAP)层以及分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层部署在CU0111;无线链路层控制协议(Radio Link Control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)、物理层(physical layer,PHY)部署在DU0121。另一种可能的方式是将将RRC、PDCP、RLC、SDAP和MAC和部分物理层部署在CU0111,将部分物理层部署在DU0121。需要说明的是,上述功能切分只是一个例子,还有可能有其他切分的方式,本申请实施例对此不作限制。Under the CU-DU architecture, some functions of MN01 are deployed on CU0111, and other functions of MN01 are deployed on DU0121. The functional division of CU0111 and DU0121 can be divided according to the wireless protocol stack. One possible way is to deploy radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation (SDAP) layer, and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer at CU0111; wireless A link layer control protocol (Radio Link Control, RLC), media access control (MAC), and physical layer (PHY) are deployed in DU0121. Another possible way is to deploy RRC, PDCP, RLC, SDAP and MAC and part of the physical layer on CU0111 and part of the physical layer on DU0121. It should be noted that the above function division is only an example, and there may be other division manners, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
SN11采用CU-DU架构时,CU1111和DU1121的功能以及功能划分可以参考上述MN01采用CU-DU架构时,CU0111和DU0121的功能以及功能划分的相关内容,在此不再赘述。When the SN11 adopts the CU-DU architecture, the functions and functional division of CU1111 and DU1121 can refer to the related content of the functions and functional division of CU0111 and DU0121 when the MN01 adopts the CU-DU architecture, which will not be repeated here.
在上述通信系统中,当承载终结于MN01(或者SN11)时,MN01(或者SN11)可以改变PDCP SN长度。In the above communication system, when the bearer ends at MN01 (or SN11), MN01 (or SN11) can change the PDCP SN length.
本申请实施例提供了一种方案,在该方案中,当承载的PDCP SN长度改变时,该承载执行释放和增加。该方案通过PDCP SN长度发生变化时,MN01和SN11之间进行交互使得MN01和SN11均可知PDCP SN长度发生了变化,从而保证MN01和终端21能够同时为终端21生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息,完成PDCP SN长度变化。The embodiment of the present application provides a solution. In this solution, when the PDCP SN length of a bearer is changed, the bearer performs release and increase. In this solution, when the length of the PDCP SN changes, the interaction between MN01 and SN11 enables both MN01 and SN11 to know that the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby ensuring that MN01 and the terminal 21 can generate bearer release and increased configuration information for the terminal 21 at the same time. To complete the PDCP SN length change.
上述方案具体可以包括第一方案、第二方案和第三方案。在第一方案中,SN11可以为PDCP锚点在SN11上的承载生成新的PDCP SN长度,当该新的PDCP SN长度与前一次PDCP SN长度相比发生变化时,SN11向MN01发送PDCP SN长度变化指示,然后MN01和SN11为终端21生成该承载的释放和增加的配置信息。在第二方案中,SN11可以向MN01发送PDCP SN长度,MN01和SN11可以保存PDCP SN长度,当PDCP SN长度发生变化时,MN01和SN11为终端21生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息。在第三方案中,对应于一种承载类型,可以固定使用一种PDCP SN长度,在承载类型发生变化时,MN01和SN11可以获知PDCP SN长度发生了变化,从而为终端21生成该承载的释放和增加的配置信息。The above scheme may specifically include the first scheme, the second scheme, and the third scheme. In the first scenario, SN11 can generate a new PDCP SN length for the PDCP anchor bearer on SN11. When the new PDCP SN length changes compared to the previous PDCP SN length, SN11 sends the PDCP SN length to MN01. The change indication, and then MN01 and SN11 generate the release and addition configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21. In the second solution, SN11 can send the PDCP SN length to MN01, and MN01 and SN11 can save the PDCP SN length. When the PDCP SN length changes, MN01 and SN11 generate terminal bearer release and increase configuration information. In the third solution, corresponding to a bearer type, a PDCP SN length can be fixedly used. When the bearer type changes, MN01 and SN11 can learn that the PDCP SN length has changed, thereby generating the release of the bearer for the terminal 21. And added configuration information.
下面对本申请实施例中可能出现的词汇进行解释。The following may explain the words that may appear in the embodiments of the present application.
1、生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以理解为生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度配置信息,该第一承载的PDCP SN长度配置可以指示第一承载的PDCP SN长度。发送或者接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以理解为发送或者接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度配置信息,该第一承载的PDCP SN长度配置可以指示第一承载的PDCP SN长度。1. Generating the PDCP SN length of the first bearer can be understood as generating the PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer, and the PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer can indicate the PDCP SN length of the first bearer. Sending or receiving the PDCP SN length of the first bearer can be understood as sending or receiving the PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer, and the PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer can indicate the PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
2、第一承载的PDCP实体在MN(或者SN)上可以理解为第一承载的PDCP锚点在MN(或者)SN上;或者,第一承载终结于MN(或者SN);或者,MN(或者SN)上存在第一承载的PDCP实体,或者,第一承载在MN(或者SN)上存在PDCP实体。2. The PDCP entity of the first bearer can be understood on the MN (or SN) as the PDCP anchor point of the first bearer on the MN (or) SN; or, the first bearer terminates on the MN (or SN); or, the MN ( Or a SN) PDCP entity exists on the first bearer, or a PDCP entity exists on the MN (or SN) on the first bearer.
MN(或者SN)上存在第一承载的RLC实体(或者MAC实体)可以理解为,第一承载在MN(或者SN)上存在RLC实体(或者MAC实体)。The RLC entity (or MAC entity) where the first bearer exists on the MN (or SN) can be understood as the existence of the RLC entity (or MAC entity) on the MN (or SN).
3、第一承载的配置信息,可以包括第一承载的PDCP实体、RLC实体、MAC实体中的一种或者多种实体的配置信息。不同实体对于实体的操作,例如释放或者增加可以有不同的叫法,本申请实施例对此不作限制。例如,MAC实体的增加,可以理解为逻辑信道的增加;或者MAC实体的释放,可以理解为逻辑信道的释放或者MAC实体的reset。3. The configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of one or more entities of the PDCP entity, the RLC entity, and the MAC entity of the first bearer. Different entities may have different names for entity operations, such as release or addition, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit this. For example, the increase of the MAC entity can be understood as the increase of the logical channel; or the release of the MAC entity can be understood as the release of the logical channel or the reset of the MAC entity.
下面首先对第一方案进行说明。The first scheme is described below first.
图8为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
S801:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。这里可以称为SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度配置信息。S801: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. This may be referred to as SN11 generating the second PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer.
由于承载的PDCP实体所在的节点才可以生成PDCP SN,本领域技术人员可以理解,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN时,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,即第一承载终结于SN。Because the node where the PDCP entity of the bearer can generate PDCP SN, those skilled in the art can understand that when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11, that is, the first bearer is terminated SN.
S802:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时, SN生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S802: When the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer, the SN generates a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以指示第一承载的PDCP SN长度发生了改变。The PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may indicate that the PDCP SN length of the first bearer has changed.
其中,当第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以为第一PDCP SN长度,可以理解为在SN11生成或者决定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度之前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,也可以理解为第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化后,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度。Wherein, before the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is generated or determined at SN11. Before, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer was the length of the first PDCP SN. It can also be understood that before the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer changes, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP SN, and the PDCP of the first bearer SN After the length is changed, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length.
作为第一种实施方式,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于SN。也就是说,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,SN11可以存储有第一承载的PDCP SN长度第一PDCP SN长度的PDCP相关的配置,例如第一PDCP SN长度,SN11可以读取第一PDCP SN长度,然后与第二PDCP SN长度进行比较,不一致时生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。As a first embodiment, when the length of the PDCP and SN of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP and SN, the first bearer terminates at the SN. In other words, before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11. SN11 can store the PDCP length of the first bearer. The PDCP configuration of the first PDCP SN length, such as the first PDCP. SN length, SN11 can read the first PDCP SN length, and then compare it with the second PDCP SN length, and generate a PDCP SN length change indication for the first bearer if they are not consistent.
在第一种实施方式中,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前后,第一承载都是终结于SN,即第一承载的PDCP实体均在SN11上。具体可以包括但不限于如下可能性:(1)第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型相同,例如,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前和PDCP SN长度变化后承载类型均为SN终结的MCG承载,SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的Split承载;(2)第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型不同,例如第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的SCG承载。In the first embodiment, before and after the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is changed, the first bearer is terminated at the SN, that is, the PDCP entities of the first bearer are all at SN11. Specifically, it may include but is not limited to the following possibilities: (1) The first bearer bears the same type before and after the PDCP SN length changes. For example, the first bearer bears the type before the PDCP SN length changes and after the PDCP SN length changes. MCG bearer, SN-terminated SCG bearer or SN-terminated split bearer; (2) the first bearer has a different bearer type before and after the SN length change, for example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is SN-terminated MCG bearer, the first bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before PDCP SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer. A bearer whose PDCP SN length changes is a SN-terminated MCG bearer or a SN-terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before the PDCP SN length is changed is an SN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer is in PDCP The bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated SCG bearer.
作为第二种实施方式,第一承载在PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于MN。也就是说,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前,第一承载的PDCP实体在MN01上,MN01可以存储有第一承载的PDCP SN长度第一PDCP SN长度的PDCP相关的配置,例如第一PDCP SN长度,MN01可以读取第一PDCP SN长度,然后MN01向SN11发送第一PDCP SN长度,SN11收到第一PDCP SN长度后,与第二PDCP SN长度进行比较,不一致时生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。As a second implementation manner, when the length of the first PDCP and the SN is the length of the first PDCP and the SN, the first bearer ends at the MN. That is, before the first bearer PDCP SN length changes, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01, and MN01 can store the PDCP length of the first bearer PDCP and the PDCP related configuration of the first PDCP SN length, such as the first PDCP SN length, MN01 can read the first PDCP SN length, and then MN01 sends the first PDCP SN length to SN11. After SN11 receives the first PDCP SN length, it compares it with the second PDCP SN length, and generates a PDCP SN length change indication.
在第二种实施方式中,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前,终结于MN,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后,终结于SN。具体可以包括但不限于如下可能性:例如,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN 终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。In the second embodiment, the first bearer ends at the MN before the PDCP SN length changes, and the first bearer ends at the SN after the PDCP SN length changes. Specifically, it may include but is not limited to the following possibilities: For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is an MN terminated MCG bearer, the bearer type of the first bearer after the PDCP SN length change is an SN terminated MCG bearer, SN-terminated SCG bearer or SN-terminated split bearer; or, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is the MN-terminated SCG bearer, and the first bearer after the PDCP SN length change is the SN-terminated MCG Bearer, SN-terminated SCG bearer, or SN-terminated split bearer; or, the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is the MN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer after the PDCP SN length change is the SN-terminated MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN terminated split bearer.
S803:SN11向MN01发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S803: SN11 sends a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to MN01.
在第一种实施方式中,可以通过辅节点修改申请消息(SN modification required)或者辅节点修改请求响应(SN modification request acknowledge)消息携带第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。In the first embodiment, a secondary node modification request message (SN modification request) or a secondary node modification request response (SN modification request request) message may carry a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
在第二种实施方式中,可以通过辅节点增加请求响应消息(SN addition request acknowledge)、辅节点修改申请消息或者修改请求响应消息携带第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。例如,当第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前为MN终结的MCG承载时,还可以通过辅节点增加请求响应消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息携带第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。In the second implementation manner, the secondary node may add a request response message (SN addition request knowledge), the secondary node modify the request message, or the modification request response message carrying the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer. For example, when the first bearer is an MCG bearer terminated by the MN before the PDCP SN length changes, the secondary node may also add a request response message or the secondary node modification request response message to carry the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
可选的,MN01在收到SN11发送的PDCP SN长度变更指示后可以进行保存。Optionally, MN01 can save after receiving the PDCP SN length change instruction sent by SN11.
可选的,MN01可以根据PDCP SN长度变更指示获知新的PDCP SN长度,例如第二PDCP SN长度,MN01可以保存第二PDCP SN长度,以便于MN01后续判断PDCP SN长度是否有变化。Optionally, MN01 can learn the new PDCP SN length according to the PDCP SN length change instruction, such as the second PDCP SN length, and MN01 can save the second PDCP SN length, so that MN01 can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed in the future.
可选的,还可以包括S804-S806。Optionally, S804-S806 can also be included.
S804:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S804: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,S804可以是与S801同时发生的,也就是说,当SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度时,可以生成第一承载的第一配置信息。Optionally, S804 may occur simultaneously with S801, that is, when SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer may be generated.
作为第一种实施方式的第一种示例,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a first example of the first embodiment, the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以通过一个信元同时包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息来实现,具体地,可以通过在一个信元中,删除一个标识和增加一个相同的标识来实现,该标识可以是承载标识。例如,当SN11是gNB时,例如在EN-DC或者NGEN-DC场景下,可以利用3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioBearerConfig信元实现,第一配置信息可以包括RadioBearerConfig,RadioBearerConfig包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,例如RadioBearerConfig中的DRB-ToReleaseList包括承载标识1,RadioBearerConfig包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,例如RadioBearerConfig中的DRB-ToAddMod包括承载标识1。通过删除和增加的承载标识相同,可以实现在一条配置消息中完成一个承载的PDCP实体先删除后增加的处理,从而实现PDCP SN长度的变更。The first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be implemented by a cell including both the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity. Specifically, the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier. For example, when SN11 is gNB, for example, in the EN-DC or NGEN-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0. The first configuration information may include RadioBearerConfig, and RadioBearerConfig includes The release configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, the DRB-ToReleaseList in RadioBearerConfig includes the bearer identifier 1, and the RadioBearerConfig includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, the DRB-ToAddMod in the RadioBearerConfig includes the bearer identifier 1. By deleting and adding the same bearer identifier, the PDCP entity of a bearer can be deleted and then added in a configuration message, so that the PDCP SN length can be changed.
例如,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以包括S802中第一种实施方式中列举的第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的可能性。For example, the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the first embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
作为第一种实施方式的第二种示例,在上述第一种实施方式的第一示例的基础上,第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example of the first embodiment, based on the first example of the first embodiment described above, the first configuration information may further include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以通过一个信元同时包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息来实现,具体地,可以通过在一个信元中,删除一个标识和增加一个相同的标识来实现,该标识可以是承载标识或者逻辑信道标识等。例如,当SN11是gNB时,例如在EN-DC或者NGEN-DC场景下,可以利用3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的CellGroupConfig信元实现,第一配置信息可以包 括CellGroupConfig,CellGroupConfig包括RLC实体的释放的配置信息,例如CellGroupConfig中的rlc-BearerToReleaseList包括逻辑信道标识1,CellGroupConfig包括RLC实体的增加的配置信息,例如CellGroupConfig中的rlc-BearerToAddModList包括逻辑信道标识1。例如,当SN11是eNB时,例如在NE-DC场景下,可以利用3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioResourceConfigDedicated信元实现,第一配置信息可以包括RadioResourceConfigDedicated,RadioResourceConfigDedicated中的DRB-ToReleaseList包括承载标识1,DRB-ToAddMod中包括承载标识1。通过删除和增加的逻辑信道标识或者承载标识相同,可以实现在一条配置消息中完成一个承载的RLC实体先删除后增加的处理,从而实现PDCP SN长度的变更。The first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, which can be implemented by one cell including both the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity. Specifically, the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier or a logical channel identifier. For example, when SN11 is gNB, for example, in the EN-DC or NGEN-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the CellGroupConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0. The first configuration information may include CellGroupConfig, and CellGroupConfig includes Release configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToReleaseList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1, and CellGroupConfig includes added configuration information of the RLC entity, for example, rlc-BearerToAddModList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1. For example, when SN11 is an eNB, for example, in the NE-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the RadioResourceConfigDedicated cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0. The first configuration information can include RadioResourceConfigDedicated, DRB-ToReleaseList in RadioResourceConfigDedicated The bearer identifier 1 is included, and the DRB-ToAddMod includes the bearer identifier 1. By deleting and adding the same logical channel identifier or bearer identifier, the process of deleting a bearer RLC entity and then adding it in a configuration message can be achieved, thereby realizing a change in PDCP SN length.
例如,第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息可以包括但不限于如下可能性:第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the first configuration information including the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity may include, but is not limited to, the possibility that the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is an SN terminated SCG bearer, and the first bearer is in the PDCP SN The bearer type after the length change is an SN-terminated SCG bearer or the SN-terminated split bearer; or, the bearer type before the PDCP SN length change is the SN-terminated split bearer, and the first bearer is the PDCP SN-length changed The bearer type is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
在第一种实施方式中,可以通过辅节点修改请求响应消息或者辅节点修改申请消息携带第一配置信息。In the first embodiment, the first configuration information may be carried by the secondary node modification request response message or the secondary node modification request message.
作为第二种实施方式的第一种示例,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。As a first example of the second implementation manner, the first configuration information includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,可以通过一个信元中包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,例如,可以通过在一个信元中,增加一个标识来实现,该标识可以是承载标识。例如,可以利用3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioBearerConfig信元实现,第一配置信息可以包括RadioBearerConfig,RadioBearerConfig包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,例如RadioBearerConfig信元中的DRB-ToAddMod包括承载标识1。The first configuration information includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be achieved by including the added configuration information of the PDCP entity in a cell, for example, it can be implemented by adding an identifier in a cell, and the identifier can be a bearer identifier. . For example, it can be implemented using the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0. The first configuration information can include RadioBearerConfig, and RadioBearerConfig includes the added configuration information of the PDCP entity. For example, DRB-ToAddMod in the RadioBearerConfig cell includes Bearer ID 1.
需要说明的是,此时第一配置信息可以不包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,由于PDCP SN长度变更前,第一承载的PDCP实体在MN01上,可以由MN01为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。It should be noted that at this time, the first configuration information may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity. Before the PDCP SN length is changed, the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01, and the MN01 can generate the PDCP entity release for the terminal 21 Configuration information.
例如,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,可以包括S802中第二种实施方式中列举的第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的可能性。For example, the first configuration information includes added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the second embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
作为第二种实施方式的第二种示例,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example of the second implementation manner, the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
可以参考第一种实施方式的第一种示例中第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息中的相关内容,在此不再赘述。For reference, in the first example of the first embodiment, the first configuration information includes related content in the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,由于PDCP SN长度变更前,第一承载的PDCP实体在MN01上,在PDCP SN长度变更后,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,且MN01的PDCP实体和SN11的PDCP实体均可以配置相同制式的PDCP实体,例如NR PDCP实体,此时可以直接由SN11生成PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,此时MN01不需要为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,可以简化网络和终端的实现复杂度。It should be noted that because the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01 before the PDCP SN length is changed, and the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11 after the PDCP SN length is changed, and the PDCP entity of MN01 and the PDCP entity of SN11 are both You can configure PDCP entities of the same standard, such as NR and PDCP entities. At this time, the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity can be generated directly by SN11. At this time, MN01 does not need to generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21, which can simplify the network. And terminal implementation complexity.
例如,第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,可以包括S802中第二种实施方式中列举的第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的可能性。For example, the first configuration information includes added configuration information of the PDCP entity, and may include the possibility of the first bearer type listed in the second embodiment in S802 before and after the PDCP SN length changes.
作为在第二种实施方式的第三种示例,在上述第二种实施方式的第一种示例和上述第二种实施方式的第二种示例的基础上,第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a third example in the second embodiment, based on the first example of the second embodiment and the second example of the second embodiment, the first configuration information may further include an RLC entity. Release and added configuration information.
可以参考第一种实施方式的第二种示例中第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息中的相关内容,在此不再赘述。For reference, in the second example of the first embodiment, the first configuration information includes related content in the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and details are not described herein again.
例如,第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以包括但不限于如下可能性:第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the first configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and may include but is not limited to the possibility that the bearer type of the first bearer before the SN length change is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN, and the first bearer is in the PDCP. The bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer before PDSN SN length change bearer type is MN terminated split bearer, the first bearer after PDCP SN length change The bearer type is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer.
在第二种实施方式中,可以通过辅节点增加请求响应消息、辅节点修改请求响应消息携带第一配置信息。例如,当第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前为MN终结的MCG承载时,还可以通过辅节点增加请求响应消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息携带第一配置信息。In the second embodiment, the secondary node may add a request response message, and the secondary node modification request response message carries the first configuration information. For example, when the first bearer is an MCG bearer terminated by the MN before the PDCP SN length changes, the secondary node may also add a request response message or the secondary node modification request response message to carry the first configuration information.
S805:SN11向MN发送第一承载的第一配置信息。S805: SN11 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN.
可选的,S803与S805可以是同时发生的,例如第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以和第一承载的第一配置信息携带在同一消息中由SN11发送给MN01。Optionally, S803 and S805 may occur simultaneously. For example, the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in the same message as the first configuration information of the first bearer and sent by SN11 to MN01.
S806:MN01向终端21发送第一承载的第一配置信息。S806: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
例如,MN01可以向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息,该RRC连接重配置消息包括第一承载的第一配置信息。For example, the MN01 may send an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal 21, and the RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,还可以包括S807-S808。Optionally, S807-S808 can also be included.
S807:MN01根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S807: MN01 generates second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
作为第一种实施方式的一种示例,第二配置信息包括RLC释放和增加的配置信息。As an example of the first embodiment, the second configuration information includes configuration information of RLC release and addition.
第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以通过一个信元同时包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息来实现,具体地,可以通过在一个信元中,删除一个标识和增加一个相同的标识来实现,该标识可以是承载标识或者逻辑信道标识等。例如,当MN01是gNB时,例如在NE-DC场景下,可以利用3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的CellGroupConfig信元实现,第一配置信息可以包括CellGroupConfig,CellGroupConfig包括RLC实体的释放的配置信息,例如CellGroupConfig中的rlc-BearerToReleaseList包括逻辑信道标识1,CellGroupConfig包括RLC实体的增加的配置信息,例如CellGroupConfig中的rlc-BearerToAddModList包括逻辑信道标识1。例如,当MN01是eNB时,例如在EN-DC或者NGEN-DC场景下,可以利用3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioResourceConfigDedicated信元实现,第二配置信息可以包括RadioResourceConfigDedicated,RadioResourceConfigDedicated中的DRB-ToReleaseList包括承载标识1,DRB-ToAddMod中包括承载标识1。通过删除和 增加的逻辑信道标识或者承载标识相同,可以实现在一条配置消息中完成一个承载的RLC实体先删除后增加的处理,从而实现PDCP SN长度的变更。The second configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, which can be implemented by one cell including both the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity. Specifically, the identifier can be deleted and added in a cell. It is implemented by a same identifier, and the identifier may be a bearer identifier or a logical channel identifier. For example, when MN01 is a gNB, for example, in the NE-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the CellGroupConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0. The first configuration information may include CellGroupConfig, and CellGroupConfig includes the release of the RLC entity. Configuration information, for example, rlc-BearerToReleaseList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1, and CellGroupConfig includes added configuration information for RLC entities, for example, rlc-BearerToAddModList in CellGroupConfig includes logical channel identification 1. For example, when MN01 is an eNB, for example, in the EN-DC or NGEN-DC scenario, it can be implemented by using the RadioResourceConfigDedicated cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0. The second configuration information can include RadioResourceConfigDedicated and RadioResourceConfigDedicated. The DRB-ToReleaseList includes the bearer identifier 1, and the DRB-ToAddMod includes the bearer identifier 1. By deleting and adding the same logical channel identifier or bearer identifier, it is possible to complete the process of deleting a bearer RLC entity and then adding it in a configuration message, thereby realizing the change of the PDCP SN length.
例如,第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息,可以包括但不限于如下可能性:第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the second configuration information includes the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity, and may include, but is not limited to, the possibility that the first bearer is a SN terminated MCG bearer before the SN length changes, and the first bearer is a PDCP The bearer type after SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer. The first bearer type before PDSN is the SN terminated split bearer. The first bearer is PDCP after SN length change. MCG bearer terminated by SN or split bearer terminated by SN.
作为第二种实施方式的第一种示例,第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。As a first example of the second implementation manner, the second configuration information includes configuration information of release of a PDCP entity.
第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,可以通过一个信元包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息来实现,具体地,可以通过在一个信元中,删除一个标识来实现,该标识可以是承载标识。例如,可以利用3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioBearerConfig信元实现,第二配置信息可以包括RadioBearerConfig,RadioBearerConfig包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,例如RadioBearerConfig信元中的DRB-ToReleaseList包括承载标识1,可以实现在一条配置消息中完成一个承载的RLC实体先删除后增加的处理,从而实现PDCP SN长度的变更。The second configuration information includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, which can be implemented by one cell including the release configuration information of the PDCP entity. Specifically, it can be implemented by deleting an identifier in a cell, and the identifier can be Bearer ID. For example, it can be implemented using the RadioBearerConfig information element in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0. The second configuration information may include RadioBearerConfig, RadioBearerConfig includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, DRB-ToReleaseList in the RadioBearerConfig information element includes The bearer identifier 1 can implement the processing of deleting a bearer RLC entity and then adding it in a configuration message, thereby realizing the change of the PDCP SN length.
需要说明的是,由于PDCP SN长度变更前,第一承载的PDCP实体在MN01上,在PDCP SN长度变更后,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,可以由MN01为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,由SN11为终端21生成PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。例如,在S802中第二种实施方式中列举的第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的可能性下,第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,It should be noted that because the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on MN01 before the PDCP SN length is changed, and the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11 after the PDCP SN length is changed, the MN01 can generate the PDCP entity release for the terminal 21 The configuration information of the PDCP entity is added by the SN11 to the terminal 21 for the PDCP entity. For example, under the possibility that the first bearer listed in the second embodiment of S802 bears before and after the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity,
作为第二种实施方式的第二种示例,在第二种实施方式的第一种示例的基础上,第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example of the second embodiment, based on the first example of the second embodiment, the second configuration information may further include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
可以参考S807中第一种实施方式中的一种示例中第二配置信息包括RLC释放和增加的配置信息的相关内容,在此不再赘述。For reference, in an example of the first implementation manner in S807, the second configuration information includes related content of RLC release and added configuration information, and details are not described herein again.
例如,在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的如下可能性中,第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息:第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, in the following possibility of the bearer type before and after the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information may also include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity: the bearer type of the first bearer before the PDCP SN length change is MN terminated MCG bearer, the first bearer bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or, the first bearer bearer type before PDCP SN length change is MN terminated split bearer. A bearer whose PDCP SN length is changed is a SN terminated MCG bearer or a SN terminated split bearer.
作为第二种实施方式的第三种示例,第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a third example of the second implementation manner, the second configuration information includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
需要说明的是,此时第二配置信息可以不包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,可以由SN11为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。It should be noted that, at this time, the second configuration information may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the SN11 may generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21.
可以参考S807中第一种实施方式中的一种示例中第二配置信息包括RLC释放和增加的配置信息的相关内容,在此不再赘述。For reference, in an example of the first implementation manner in S807, the second configuration information includes related content of RLC release and added configuration information, and details are not described herein again.
例如,在PDCP SN长度变化前后的承载类型的如下可能性中,第二配置信息可以 包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息:第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载;或者,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化前的承载类型为MN终结的split承载,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变化后的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, in the following possibility of the bearer type before and after the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information may include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity: the bearer type before the PDCP SN length change is the MCG terminated by the MN Bearer, the first bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer; or the first bearer before PDCP SN length change is MN terminated split bearer, first The bearer type after PDCP SN length change is SN terminated MCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer.
S808:MN01向终端21发送第一承载的第二配置信息。S808: MN01 sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
例如,MN01可以向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息,该RRC连接重配置消息包括第一承载的第二配置信息。For example, MN01 may send an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal 21, where the RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,S806和S808可以同时发生,例如MN01向终端21发送一条消息,该消息同时携带第一承载的第一配置信息和第二配置信息,该消息可以是RRC连接重配置消息。Optionally, S806 and S808 may occur at the same time. For example, MN01 sends a message to terminal 21, the message carries both the first configuration information and the second configuration information of the first bearer, and the message may be an RRC connection reconfiguration message.
下面结合图9至图12a对改变PDCP SN长度进行进一步的说明。The description of changing the length of the PDCP and SN is further described below with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12a.
下面结合SN增加请求流程,介绍在SN增加请求流程中如何改变PDCP SN长度。The following describes how to change the PDCP SN length in the SN increase request process in combination with the SN increase request process.
图9为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
S901:MN01向SN11发送辅节点增加请求消息。S901: MN01 sends a secondary node addition request message to SN11.
在MN01向SN11发送辅节点增加请求消息之前,第一承载的承载类型可以是MN终结的MCG承载,MN01可以决定增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型,增加辅节点后第一承载可以终结于SN,即增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,例如,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。Before MN01 sends a secondary node addition request message to SN11, the bearer type of the first bearer can be the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, MN01 can decide the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and the first bearer can be terminated after adding the secondary node. SN, that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. For example, the type of the bearer of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
辅节点增加请求消息可以包括:The secondary node addition request message may include:
(1)第一承载的承载标识。(1) The bearer identifier of the first bearer.
(2)增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型的指示信息。(2) The indication information of the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
例如,可以包括增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体是否在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载是否存在MCG资源,增加辅节点后第一承载的是否存在SCG资源。For example, it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
例如,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载存在MCG资源,不存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载;或者,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载不存在MCG资源,存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载;或者,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载存在MCG资源,存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载。For example, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. MCG resources exist in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and there is no SCG resource, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is the SN terminated MCG bearer. Alternatively, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. There is no MCG resource and SCG resource for the first bearer after adding the secondary node, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated SCG bearer. Alternatively, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. The first bearer after adding the secondary node has MCG resources and SCG resources, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated split bearer.
(3)MN01上第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息,包括MN01上第一承载的PDCP SN长度,即图8中的第一PDCP SN长度,例如第一PDCP SN长度可以是12bit。MN01上第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息可以用于辅助SN11生成新的PDCP实体的配置信息。(3) The configuration information of the PDCP entity carried on the first bearer on MN01 includes the PDCP SN length of the first bearer on MN01, that is, the first PDCP SN length in FIG. 8, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits. The configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the first bearer on the MN01 may be used to assist the SN11 to generate configuration information of a new PDCP entity.
下面S902-S907作为S801-S808的一种示例,进一步进行了描述。The following S902-S907 are further described as an example of S801-S808.
S902:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S902: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
在S902之前,由于增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,SN11可以 决定生成PDCP SN长度,即图8中S801中的第二PDCP SN长度,例如第二PDCP SN长度为18bit。Prior to S902, since the first PDCP entity carried on the secondary node was added to SN11, SN11 may decide to generate the PDCP SN length, that is, the second PDCP SN length in S801 in FIG. 8, for example, the second PDCP SN length is 18 bits.
S903:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S903: When the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer, SN11 generates a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
其中,当第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以为第一PDCP SN长度,可以理解为在SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度之前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,也可以理解为第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化后,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度。Wherein, when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that before the SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, The PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length. It can also be understood that before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, and the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes. Then, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the second PDCP SN.
例如,第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度为12bit,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度为18bit,第一PDCP SN长度和第二PDCP SN长度不同,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。For example, the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer is 12 bits, the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is 18 bits, the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, and SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer. .
S904:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S904: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,S902可以是与S904同时发生的,也就是说,当SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息时,可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。Optionally, S902 may occur at the same time as S904, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载的第一配置信息可以为SN11为终端21生成的第一承载在SN11上的实体的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
由于增加辅节点前第一承载没有实体在SN11上,例如增加辅节点前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的PDCP实体、RLC实体和MAC实体均在MN01上;增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体或者MAC实体可以在或者不在SN11上,RLC实体或者MAC实体可以在或者不在MN01上,例如增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,第一承载的RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01上;增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的PDCP实体、RLC实体和MAC实体在SN11上;增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,第一承载的RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01和SN11上。Because there is no entity on the SN11 before adding the secondary node, for example, the type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is the MCG bearer terminated by MN. The PDCP entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity of the first bearer are all on MN01. The first PDCP entity carried by the secondary node is on SN11. The RLC entity or MAC entity may or may not be on SN11, and the RLC entity or MAC entity may or may not be on MN01. For example, after the secondary node is added, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN. Terminated MCG bearer, PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11, RLC entity and MAC entity of the first bearer are on MN01; after adding a secondary node, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer, and PDCP of the first bearer Entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity are on SN11; after adding a secondary node, the first bearer bearer type is an SN-terminated split bearer, the first bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, and the first bearer RLC entity and MAC entity are on MN01 and On SN11.
若增加辅节点前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)不在SN11上,增加辅节点后该实体在SN11上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的增加的配置信息。If the previous entity (such as PDCP entity, RLC entity, or MAC entity) of the secondary node is not on SN11, and the entity is on SN11 after adding the secondary node, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the additional configuration information of the entity. .
第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的增加的配置信息;或者,例如,第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,例如,MN01和SN11的PDCP均可以是NR PDCP,MN01可以为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放信息,也可以直接由SN11在生成PDCP实体的增加的配置信息的同时生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,此时不需要MN01再生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as added configuration information of the PDCP entity; or, for example, the first configuration information may include release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, MN01 and SN11 All PDCPs can be NR PDCP, MN01 can generate the release information of PDCP entity for terminal 21, or it can directly generate the release configuration information of PDCP entity while generating the additional configuration information of PDCP entity by SN11, MN01 is not needed at this time Regenerate the configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,第一承载的第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的配置信息和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体的增加的配置信息和MAC实体增加的配置信息。Optionally, the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity, such as added configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity.
例如,增加辅节点前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括 PDCP实体的增加的配置信息或者PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the secondary node is added is the MN terminated MCG bearer, and the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is the SN terminated MCG bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include the addition of the PDCP entity. Configuration information or release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
例如,增加辅节点前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息或者PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,以及RLC实体的增加的配置信息和MAC实体增加的配置信息。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the secondary node is added is an MN terminated MCG bearer, the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer, and the first configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the added configuration information of the PDCP entity or the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity, as well as the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the added configuration information of the MAC entity.
本申请实施例中,例如,MN01或者SN01上的PDCP实体的配置信息,可以通过3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioBearerConfig信元实现;MN01或者SN01的RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,可以通过3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的CellGroupConfig信元或者3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0的章节6.3.2中的RadioResourceConfigDedicated信元实现。In the embodiment of the present application, for example, the configuration information of the PDCP entity on MN01 or SN01 may be implemented by the RadioBearerConfig cell in section 6.3.2 of 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0; the configuration of the RLC entity and the MAC entity of MN01 or SN01 The information can be implemented through the CellGroupConfig cell in 3GPP TS38.331V15.1.0 section 6.3.2 or the RadioResourceConfigDedicated cell in 3GPP TS36.331V15.1.0 section 6.3.2.
S905:SN11向MN01发送辅节点增加请求响应消息。S905: SN11 sends a secondary node addition request response message to MN01.
辅节点增加请求响应消息可以包括第一承载的承载标识、第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示和第一承载的第一配置信息。The secondary node addition request response message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,可以辅节点增加请求响应消息中定义一个新的信元,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以携带在这个新的信元中。可以用1bit携带PDCP SN长度变化指示,例如1代表PDCP SN长度变化,0代表PDCP SN长度没有变化。Optionally, the secondary node may define a new cell in the request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in this new cell. You can use 1 bit to carry the PDCP SN length change indication. For example, 1 represents the PDCP SN length change, and 0 represents the PDCP SN length has not changed.
S906:MN01根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S906: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
第一承载的第二配置信息可以为MN01为终端21生成的第一承载在MN01上的实体的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
若增加辅节点前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在MN01上,增加辅节点后该实体在MN01上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息;若增加辅节点前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在MN01上,增加辅节点后该实体不在MN01上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放的配置信息。If the previous entity (such as PDCP entity, RLC entity, or MAC entity) of the secondary node is added to MN01, and the entity is added to MN01 after the secondary node is added, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release and addition of the entity. Configuration information; if the previous entity (such as PDCP entity, RLC entity, or MAC entity) of the secondary node is added on MN01, the entity is not on MN01 after the secondary node is added, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity Configuration information.
第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。此时由MN01为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。或者,第一承载的第二配置信息可以不包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,由SN11为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。The second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, for example, release information of the PDCP entity. At this time, the MN01 generates the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21. Alternatively, the second configuration information of the first bearer may not include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the SN 11 generates the release configuration information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21.
可选的,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as the release and addition configuration information of the RLC entity and the release and addition configuration information of the MAC entity.
例如,增加辅节点前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is the MN terminated MCG bearer, and the bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is the SN terminated MCG or the SN terminated split bearer.
可选的,第一承载的第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体的释放的配置信息和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information released by the RLC entity and configuration information released by the MAC entity.
例如,增加辅节点前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before adding the secondary node is an MN terminated MCG bearer, and the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated SCG bearer.
S907:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S907: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息中可以包括第一承载的标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第 一承载的第二配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the identifier of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S908:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S908: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息执行所述承载的先删除后增加操作。The terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S909:MN01向SN11发送SN重配置完成消息。S909: MN01 sends an SN reconfiguration completion message to SN11.
S910:终端21与SN11完成随机接入。S910: The terminal 21 and the SN11 complete random access.
下面结合辅节点触发辅节点修改流程,介绍在辅节点修改流程中如何改变PDCP SN长度。The following describes how to change the PDCP and SN length in the secondary node modification process in conjunction with the secondary node triggering the secondary node modification process.
在完成辅节点增加后,例如可以参考图9中的相关内容,第一承载的PDCP实体可以在SN11上,例如,第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。SN11可以维护PDCP配置,例如,通过该辅节点修改流程,SN11可以在不改变承载类型的情况下,SN11可以对PDCP SN长度进行修改。After the secondary node is added, for example, you can refer to the related content in Figure 9. The PDCP entity of the first bearer can be on SN11. For example, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN terminated MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN. The end of the split bearer. SN11 can maintain PDCP configuration. For example, through the secondary node modification process, SN11 can modify the PDCP SN length without changing the bearer type.
图10为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施实施方式的示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
S1001:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S1001: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
例如,第二PDCP SN长度可以是12bit。For example, the length of the second PDCP SN may be 12 bits.
例如,第一承载为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
S1002:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S1002: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,S1002可以是与S1001同时发生的,也就是说,当SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息时,可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。Optionally, S1002 may occur simultaneously with S1001, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载的第一配置信息可以为SN11为终端21生成的第一承载在SN11上的实体的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
在改变PDCP SN长度前后,第一承载的承载类型不变,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体可以在或者不在SN11上,例如第一承载为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体不在SN11上;第一承载为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体在SN11上。Before and after the PDCP SN length is changed, the bearer type of the first bearer remains unchanged. The PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11. The RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be on SN11. For example, the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer. One bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, RLC entity and MAC entity are not on SN11; the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer, the first bearer PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and MAC entity are on On SN11.
例如,若增加辅节点前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在SN11上,增加辅节点后该实体在SN11上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, if a previous entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) is added to the SN11 and the secondary node is added to the SN11, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity and the Added configuration information.
第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
可选的,第一承载的第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Optionally, the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,第一承载为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an MCG bearer terminated by an SN, and the first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity.
例如,第一承载为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息、以及RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and addition configuration information of the PDCP entity, and release and addition configuration of the RLC entity and the MAC entity. information.
S1003:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S1003: When the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, SN11 generates a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
其中,当第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以为第一PDCP SN长度,可以理解为在SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度之前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,也可以理解为第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化后,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度。Wherein, when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that before the SN11 generates the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, The PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length. It can also be understood that before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, and the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes. Then, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the second PDCP SN.
在改变PDCP SN长度之前,第一承载终结于SN11,SN11可以获取第一PDCP SN长度,例如,第一PDCP SN长度可以是18bit。Before changing the PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at SN11. SN11 can obtain the first PDCP SN length. For example, the first PDCP SN length can be 18 bits.
例如,第一PDCP SN长度可以是18bit,第二PDCP SN长度可以是12bit,第一PDCP SN长度和第二PDCP SN长度不同,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。For example, the length of the first PDCP SN may be 18 bits, the length of the second PDCP SN may be 12 bits, the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, and SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
S1004:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改申请消息。S1004: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
辅节点修改申请消息可以包括第一承载的承载标识、第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示和第一承载的第一配置信息。The secondary node modification request message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,可以在辅节点修改申请消息中定义一个新的信元,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以携带在这个新的信元中。可以用1bit携带PDCP SN长度变化指示,例如1代表PDCP SN长度变化,0代表PDCP SN长度没有变化。Optionally, a new cell can be defined in the secondary node modification request message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer can be carried in this new cell. You can use 1 bit to carry the PDCP SN length change indication. For example, 1 represents the PDCP SN length change, and 0 represents the PDCP SN length has not changed.
S1005:MN01根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S1005: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
第一承载的第二配置信息可以为MN01为终端21生成的第一承载在MN01上的实体的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
例如,若增加辅节点前一实体(例如RLC实体或者MAC实体)在MN01上,增加辅节点后该实体在MN01上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, if the previous entity (such as the RLC entity or the MAC entity) of the secondary node is added to MN01, and the entity is added to MN01 after the secondary node is added, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity and the added configuration. information.
第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The second configuration information carried by the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as the release and addition configuration information of the RLC entity and the release and addition configuration information of the MAC entity.
例如,第一承载为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer or an SN-terminated split bearer. The second configuration information of the first bearer may include release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,第一承载为SN终结的SCG承载时,第一承载没有在MN01上实体,可以不生成第一承载的第二配置信息。For example, when the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by an SN, the first bearer is not physically located on MN01, and the second configuration information of the first bearer may not be generated.
S1006:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S1006: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息中可以包括第一承载的标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the identifier of the first bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1007:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S1007: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息执行所述承载的先删除后增加操作。The terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1008:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改确认消息。S1008: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation message to SN11.
下面结合辅节点修改流程,介绍在辅节点修改流程中如何改变PDCP SN长度。The following describes how to change the PDCP SN length in the secondary node modification process in conjunction with the secondary node modification process.
在完成辅节点增加或者辅节点触发的辅节点修改后,例如可以参考图9和图10中的相关内容,第一承载的PDCP实体可以在SN11上,例如,第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。可选的,MN01可以通过发起辅节点修改流程,或者SN11可以通过请求MN01发起辅节点修改流程,改变第一承载的承载类型,例如,第一承载的类型MN终结的MCG承载、MN终结的SCG承载或者MN终结的split承载。通过MN01可以通过发起辅节点修改流程,或者SN11可以通过请求MN01发起辅节点修改流程,可以在第一承载的上述六种承载类型下,改变或者不改变承载类型,由SN11对PDCP SN长度进行修改。After the addition of the secondary node or the modification of the secondary node triggered by the secondary node is completed, for example, reference may be made to the related content in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10. The PDCP entity of the first bearer may be on the SN11. For example, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN termination. MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN terminated split bearer. Optionally, MN01 can initiate a secondary node modification process, or SN11 can request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process to change the bearer type of the first bearer, for example, the type of the first bearer is MN terminated MCG bearer, MN terminated SCG Bearer or split bearer terminated by MN. The MN01 can initiate the secondary node modification process, or the SN11 can request the MN01 to initiate the secondary node modification process. The above six types of bearers of the first bearer can be used to change or not change the bearer type, and the PDCP and SN length can be modified by SN11. .
图11为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施实施方式的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
S1101:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息。S1101: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
在MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息之前,第一承载的承载类型可以是MN终结的MCG承载、MN终结的SCG承载、MN终结的split承载、SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。Before MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11, the bearer type of the first bearer can be MN terminated MCG bearer, MN terminated SCG bearer, MN terminated split bearer, SN terminated MCG bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer, or SN terminated split bearer.
MN01可以通过辅节点修改请求消息修改第一承载的承载类型,例如可以将第一承载的承载类型修改为SN终结的承载类型,例如,上述三种MN终结的承载类型可以修改为任一种SN终结的承载类型,上述一种SN终结的承载类型可以修改为其他两种SN终结的承载类型。MN01 can modify the bearer type of the first bearer through the secondary node modification request message. For example, the bearer type of the first bearer can be changed to the SN-terminated bearer type. For example, the three types of MN-terminated bearer types can be modified to any kind of SN. Terminated bearer type. The above-mentioned SN-terminated bearer type can be modified to the other two SN-terminated bearer types.
辅节点修改请求消息可以包括:The secondary node modification request message may include:
(1)第一承载的承载标识。(1) The bearer identifier of the first bearer.
(2)修改后的承载类型的指示信息。(2) The indication information of the modified bearer type.
修改后的承载类型可以为SN终结的承载类型。The modified bearer type may be an SN terminated bearer type.
例如,可以包括承载类型修改后的第一承载的PDCP实体是否在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载是否存在MCG资源,增加辅节点后第一承载的是否存在SCG资源。For example, it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists in the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
(3)可选的,当改变第一承载的承载类型前,第一承载终结于MN01,可以包括MN01上第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息,可以包括MN01上第一承载的PDCP SN长度,即图8中的第一PDCP SN长度,例如第一PDCP SN长度可以是12bit。MN01上第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息可以用于辅助SN11生成新的PDCP实体的配置信息。(3) Optionally, before changing the bearer type of the first bearer, the first bearer terminates on MN01, which may include configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer on MN01, and may include the PDCP SN length of the first bearer on MN01, That is, the first PDCP SN length in FIG. 8, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits. The configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the first bearer on the MN01 may be used to assist the SN11 to generate configuration information of a new PDCP entity.
可选的在S1101之前,还可以包括S1100。Optional Before S1101, S1100 can also be included.
S1100:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改申请消息。S1100: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
可以由SN11请求MN01发起辅节点修改流程。MN11 may request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process.
S1102:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S1102: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
由于第一承载的承载类型修改后,第一承载可以终结于SN,SN11可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,即图8中S801中的第二PDCP SN长度,例如第二PDCP SN长度为18bit。After the bearer type of the first bearer is modified, the first bearer can be terminated at the SN, and the SN11 can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, that is, the second PDCP SN length in S801 in FIG. 8, such as the second PDCP SN length It is 18bit.
S1103:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S1103: When the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, SN11 generates a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
其中,当第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以为第一PDCP SN长度。Wherein, before the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN.
例如,第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度为12bit,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度为18bit,第一PDCP SN长度和第二PDCP SN长度不同,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。For example, the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer is 12 bits, the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is 18 bits, the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, and SN11 generates a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer. .
S1104:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S1104: SN11 generates first configuration information of a first bearer.
可选的,S1103可以是与S1102同时发生的,也就是说,当SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息时,可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。Optionally, S1103 can occur simultaneously with S1102, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载的第一配置信息可以为SN11为终端21生成的第一承载在SN11上的实体的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 generated by the SN11 for the terminal 21.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载可以终结于SN,改变承载类型前第一承载的PDCP实体可以在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体可以在或者不在SN11上,RLC实体或者MAC实体可以在或者不在MN01上。例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为SN终结的MCG承载,PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01上;例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为SN终结的SCG承载,PDCP实体、RLC实体和MAC实体在SN11上;例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为SN终结的split承载,PDCP实体在SN11上,RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01和SN01上。改变承载类型后第一承载可以终结于SN,其在SN11上的实体可以参考改变承载类型前的第一承载在SN11上的实体的相关描述。Before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the SN. The PDCP entity of the first bearer may be at SN11 before the bearer type is changed. The RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be at SN11. The RLC entity or the MAC entity may or may not be at. On MN01. For example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer. The PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01. For example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer, the PDCP entity, The RLC entity and the MAC entity are on SN11; for example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is the split bearer terminated by SN, the PDCP entity is on SN11, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01 and SN01. After the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the SN. For the entity on the SN11, refer to the related description of the first bearer entity on the SN11 before the bearer type is changed.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载可以终结于MN,改变承载类型前第一承载的PDCP实体可以在MN01上,RLC实体和MAC实体可以在或者不在MN01上,RLC实体或者MAC实体可以在或者不在SN11上。例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为MN终结的MCG承载,PDCP实体在MN01上,RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01上;例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为MN终结的SCG承载,PDCP实体可以在MN01上,RLC实体和MAC实体在SN11上;例如,改变承载类型前第一承载为MN终结的split承载,PDCP实体在MN01上,RLC实体和MAC实体在MN01和SN01上。改变承载类型后第一承载可以终结于SN,其在SN11上的实体可以参考改变承载类型前的第一承载在SN11上的实体的相关描述。Before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the MN. Before the bearer type is changed, the PDCP entity of the first bearer may be on MN01, the RLC entity and the MAC entity may or may not be on MN01, and the RLC entity or the MAC entity may be on or off. On SN11. For example, before changing the bearer type, the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the PDCP entity is on MN01, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on the MN01; for example, before the bearer type is changed, the first bearer is the MN terminated SCG bearer, the PDCP entity can On MN01, the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on SN11; for example, before changing the bearer type, the first bearer is the split bearer terminated by MN, the PDCP entity is on MN01, and the RLC entity and the MAC entity are on MN01 and SN01. After the bearer type is changed, the first bearer may be terminated at the SN. For the entity on the SN11, refer to the related description of the first bearer entity on the SN11 before the bearer type is changed.
若改变承载类型之前,一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)不在SN11上,改变承载类型之后后该实体在SN11上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的增加的配置信息;若改变承载类型之前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在SN11上,改变承载类型之后该实体在SN11上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息;若改变承载类型之前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在SN11上,改变承载类型之后该实体不在SN11上,第一承载上的第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放的配置信息。If an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) is not on the SN11 before the bearer type is changed, and the entity is on the SN11 after the bearer type is changed, the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the addition of the entity. Configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on SN11 before the bearer type was changed, the entity was on SN11 after the bearer type was changed, and the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity And added configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on SN11 before the bearer type was changed, the entity was not on SN11 after the bearer type was changed, and the first configuration information on the first bearer may include the Release configuration information for the entity.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载终结于SN,即第一承载从SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种修改为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的另一种,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括如下:Before changing the bearer type, the first bearer terminates in the SN, that is, the first bearer is modified from the SN-terminated MCG bearer, the SN-terminated SCG bearer, or the SN-terminated split bearer. The other of the SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
作为第一种示例,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of a PDCP entity, such as release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
作为第二种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example, on the basis of the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第三种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。As a third example, based on the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第四种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。As a fourth example, on the basis of the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载;或者,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息和RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN-terminated SCG bearer, and after the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN-terminated split bearer; or, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN. Terminated split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the SCG bearer terminated by SN. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include the release of the PDCP entity and the added configuration information, and the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity. Added configuration information.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息和RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the SN. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP. Release information of the entity and added configuration information and release configuration information of the RLC entity and MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载或者SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息和RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated split bearer or an SN terminated SCG bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity and the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载终结于MN,即第一承载从MN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种修改为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括如下:Before changing the bearer type, the first bearer terminates at the MN, that is, one of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the SCG bearer terminated by the SN, or the split bearer terminated by the SN is modified to the SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated The SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
作为第一种示例,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,或者,例如,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP的释放和增加的配置信息。例如,MN01和SN11的PDCP均可以是NR PDCP,MN01可以为终端21生成PDCP实体的释放信息,也可以直接由SN11在生成PDCP实体的增加的配置信息的同时生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息,此时不需要MN01再生成PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。As a first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the PDCP entity, such as added configuration information of the PDCP entity, or, for example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include release and addition of PDCP Configuration information. For example, the PDCP of MN01 and SN11 can both be NR and PDCP. MN01 can generate the release information of the PDCP entity for the terminal 21, or it can directly generate the release configuration information of the PDCP entity while generating the additional configuration information of the PDCP entity. At this time, MN01 does not need to generate the configuration information of the release of the PDCP entity again.
作为第二种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example, on the basis of the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第三种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。As a third example, on the basis of the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第四种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。As a fourth example, on the basis of the first example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息或者PDCP的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, and the bearer type of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is the SN terminated MCG bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration of the PDCP entity. Information or PDCP release and added configuration information.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载或者MN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息或者PDCP的释放和增加的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated SCG bearer or the MN terminated split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. The first configuration information carried may include configuration information of the PDCP entity or configuration information of release and addition of the PDCP, and configuration information of release and addition of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者split承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息或者PDCP的释放和增加的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated MCG bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or a split bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP. The configuration information of the entity or the release and added configuration information of the PDCP, and the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载或者MN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息或者PDCP的释放和增加的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN or the split bearer of the MN terminates. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN. The first configuration information of the first bearer It may include configuration information of the PDCP entity or release and addition configuration information of the PDCP, and configuration information of release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
S1105:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改请求响应消息。S1105: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
辅节点修改请求响应消息可以包括第一承载的承载标识、第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示和第一承载的第一配置信息。The secondary node modification request response message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer, and first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,可以在辅节点修改请求响应消息中定义一个新的信元,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以携带在这个新的信元中。可以用1bit携带PDCP SN长度变化指示,例如1代表PDCP SN长度变化,0代表PDCP SN长度没有变化。Optionally, a new cell can be defined in the secondary node modification request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer can be carried in this new cell. You can use 1 bit to carry the PDCP SN length change indication. For example, 1 represents the PDCP SN length change, and 0 represents the PDCP SN length has not changed.
S1106:MN01根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S1106: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
第一承载的第二配置信息可以为MN01为终端21生成的第一承载在MN01上的实体的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer may be configuration information of the first bearer on the MN01 generated by the MN01 for the terminal 21.
若改变承载类型之前,一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)不在MN01上,改变承载类型之后后该实体在MN01上,第一承载上的第二配置信息可以包括该实体的增加的配置信息;若改变承载类型之前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在MN01上,改变承载类型之后该实体在MN01上,第一承载上的第二配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息;若改变承载类型之前一实体(例如PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体)在MN01上,改变承载类型之后该实体不在MN01上,第一承载上的第二配置信息可以包括该实体的释放的配置信息。If an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) is not on MN01 before the bearer type is changed, and the entity is on MN01 after the bearer type is changed, the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the addition of the entity. Configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on MN01 before the bearer type was changed, and the entity was on MN01 after the bearer type was changed, the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the release of the entity And added configuration information; if an entity (such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity) was on MN01 before the bearer type was changed, the entity was not on MN01 after the bearer type was changed, and the second configuration information on the first bearer may include the Release configuration information for the entity.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载终结于SN,即第一承载从SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种修改为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的另一种,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括如下:Before changing the bearer type, the first bearer terminates in the SN, that is, the first bearer is modified from the SN-terminated MCG bearer, the SN-terminated SCG bearer, or the SN-terminated split bearer. For the other of the SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
作为第一种示例,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a first example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第二种示例,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。As a second example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第三种示例,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的 配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。As a third example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载;或者修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, before modifying the bearer type, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer, and after modifying the bearer type, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated split bearer; or before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is SN terminated. Split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN. The second configuration information of the first bearer may include the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer is The configuration information of the release of the RLC entity and the MAC entity may be included.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. The second configuration information of the first bearer is Added configuration information for RLC entities and MAC entities may be included.
当改变承载类型之前,第一承载终结于MN,即第一承载从MN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种修改为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载中的一种,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括如下:Before changing the bearer type, the first bearer terminates at the MN, that is, one of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, the SCG bearer terminated by the SN, or the split bearer terminated by the SN is modified to the SN terminated MCG bearer or the SN terminated The SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer. The first configuration information of the first bearer may include the following:
作为第一种示例,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的配置信息,例如PDCP实体的删除的配置信息。As a first example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of a PDCP entity, such as deleted configuration information of a PDCP entity.
作为第二种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。As a second example, on the basis of the first example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第三种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。As a third example, on the basis of the first example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, for example, increased configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
作为第四种示例,在第一种示例的基础上,第一承载的第二配置信息还可以包括RLC实体和MAC实体的的配置信息,例如RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。As a fourth example, on the basis of the first example, the second configuration information of the first bearer may further include configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity, such as release configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,或者不包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,此时MN01可以不生成第二配置信息。For example, before modifying the bearer type, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN. After modifying the bearer type, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the SN. The second configuration information of the first bearer may include deletion of the PDCP entity. MN01 may not generate the second configuration information, or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载或者split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者split承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,或者不包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the MN. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or the split bearer terminated by the SN. The second configuration information of the first bearer is It may include deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, or does not include deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and release and added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载或者split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,或者不包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的释放的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer or split bearer terminated by the MN. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer. The second configuration information of the first bearer may include PDCP. The deleted configuration information of the entity, or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the released configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的SCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载 的第二配置信息可以包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,或者不包括PDCP实体的删除的配置信息,以及RLC实体和MAC实体的增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated SCG bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. The second configuration information of the first bearer is It may include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, or does not include the deleted configuration information of the PDCP entity, and the added configuration information of the RLC entity and the MAC entity.
S1107:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S1107: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息可以包括第一承载的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, first configuration information of the first bearer, and second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1108:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S1108: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息执行所述承载的先删除后增加操作。The terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1109:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改确认(SN modification confirm)消息。S1109: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation (SN) confirmation message to SN11.
图12a为改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施实施方式的示意图。FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
第一承载可以终结于SN,SN11可以请求MN01发起辅节点修改流程,来对第一承载的承载类型进行修改,修改后的第一承载终结于SN,也就是说可以将上述一种SN终结的承载类型可以修改为其他两种SN终结的承载类型。The first bearer can be terminated at the SN. SN11 can request MN01 to initiate a secondary node modification process to modify the bearer type of the first bearer. The modified first bearer is terminated at the SN. The bearer type can be modified to two other SN-terminated bearer types.
S1201:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S1201: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
S1202:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,SN11生成第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S1202: When the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, SN11 generates a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
S1203:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改申请消息。S1203: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
辅节点修改申请消息包括第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。The secondary node modification request message includes a PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer.
可选的,可以在辅节点增加请求响应消息中定义一个新的信元,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示可以携带在这个新的信元中。可以用1bit携带PDCP SN长度变化指示,例如1代表PDCP SN长度变化,0代表PDCP SN长度没有变化。Optionally, a new cell may be defined in the secondary node addition request response message, and the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer may be carried in this new cell. You can use 1 bit to carry the PDCP SN length change indication. For example, 1 represents the PDCP SN length change, and 0 represents the PDCP SN length has not changed.
S1204:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息。S1204: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
S1205:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S1205: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
S1206:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改请求响应消息。S1206: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
S1207:MN01根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S1207: MN01 generates the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer.
S1208:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S1208: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息可以包括第一承载的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a bearer identifier of the first bearer, first configuration information of the first bearer, and second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1209:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S1209: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息执行所述承载的先删除后增加操作。The terminal 21 performs a delete-before-add operation of the bearer according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the second configuration information of the first bearer.
S1210:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改确认(SN modification confirm)消息。S1210: MN01 sends a SN modification confirmation message to the SN11.
S1201-S1210其他内容可以参考图11中的相关内容,例如关于“当改变承载类型之前,第一承载可以终结于SN”的相关内容。For other contents of S1201-S1210, reference may be made to the related content in FIG. 11, for example, related content about "the first bearer may be terminated at the SN before the bearer type is changed".
在第一方案中,通过MN01和SN01交互PDCP SN长度变更指示,使得MN01和SN11为终端21生成该承载的释放和增加的配置信息,完成PDCP SN长度变更。另外,当PDCP SN长度可以为12bit或者18bit时,MN01在收到PDCP SN长度变更指示后,结合MN01保存的PDCP SN长度,能够获知到新的PDCP SN长度,以便于MN01后 续可以判断PDCP SN长度是否发生改变,以便后续为承载生成释放和增加的配置信息。In the first solution, the MN01 and SN01 exchange PDCP SN length change instructions, so that MN01 and SN11 generate the release and added configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21 to complete the PDCP SN length change. In addition, when the PDCP SN length can be 12 bits or 18 bits, after receiving the PDCP SN length change instruction, MN01 can learn the new PDCP SN length in combination with the PDCP SN length saved by MN01, so that MN01 can determine the PDCP SN length in the future. Whether it has changed so that subsequent releases and additions of configuration information are generated for the bearer.
下面对第二方案进行说明。The second solution is described below.
图12b是改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施实施方式的示意图。FIG. 12b is a schematic diagram of another implementation manner of changing the length of the PDCP and SN.
S12b01:SN11生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S12b01: SN11 generates a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
可以参考S801中的相关内容。You can refer to the related content in S801.
S12b02:SN11判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。S12b02: SN11 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,PDCP SN长度发生变化。When the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, the PDCP SN length changes.
其中,当第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度前,第一承载的PDCP SN长度可以为第一PDCP SN长度。Wherein, before the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is before the length of the second PDCP SN, the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer may be the length of the first PDCP SN.
作为第一种实施方式,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于SN,SN11可以获取第一PDCP SN长度。As a first implementation manner, when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the SN, and SN11 can obtain the first PDCP SN length.
作为第二种实施方式,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于MN,还可以包括MN01向SN11发送第一PDCP SN长度,例如可以通过辅节点增加请求消息、辅节点修改请求消息发送第一PDCP SN长度。As a second implementation manner, when the length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP SN, the first bearer terminates at the MN, and may further include the MN01 sending the first PDCP SN length to the SN11, for example, a request message may be added through a secondary node The secondary node sends a first PDCP SN length to modify the request message.
其他内容可以参考S802中的相关内容。For other contents, please refer to the related contents in S802.
当PDCP SN长度发生变化,还可以包括S1203、S1205-S1208的步骤。When the PDCP and SN lengths change, the steps of S1203 and S1205-S1208 can also be included.
S12b03:SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S12b03: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,S1203可以是与S1201同时发生的,也就是说,当SN11生成第一承载的第一配置信息时,可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。Optionally, S1203 can occur simultaneously with S1201, that is, when SN11 generates the first configuration information of the first bearer, it can generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
可以参考图8中的S804,在此不再赘述。Reference may be made to S804 in FIG. 8, and details are not described herein again.
S12b04:SN11向MN01发送第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S12b04: SN11 sends the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer to MN01.
例如,SN11可以通过辅节点增加请求消息、辅节点修改请求消息或者辅节点修改申请消息发送第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。For example, SN11 may send the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer through the secondary node adding a request message, a secondary node modification request message, or a secondary node modification request message.
作为第一种示例,SN11可以在S1202中判断PDCP SN长度发生变化时,向MN01发送第二PDCP SN长度。As a first example, SN11 may send a second PDCP SN length to MN01 when it determines that the PDCP SN length changes in S1202.
作为第二种示例,SN11可以在生成第二PDCP SN长度后,向MN01发送第二PDCP SN长度。也就是说在PDCP SN长度发生变化或者不发生变化时,SN11都可以向MN01发送第二PDCP SN长度。As a second example, SN11 may send the second PDCP SN length to MN01 after generating the second PDCP SN length. That is, when the PDCP SN length changes or does not change, SN11 can send the second PDCP SN length to MN01.
MN01可以读取第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,可选的,MN01可以保存第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。MN01 can read the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. Optionally, MN01 can save the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
例如,SN11可以将第二PDCP SN长度携带在MN01会读取的信元中,从而发送给MN01。For example, SN11 may carry the second PDCP SN length in a cell that MN01 will read, and send it to MN01.
例如,SN11可以定义新的信元,该信元包括第二PDCP SN长度,MN01可以读取该信元中的第二PDCP SN长度。For example, SN11 may define a new cell that includes the second PDCP SN length, and MN01 may read the second PDCP SN length in the cell.
可以参考3GPP TS36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.3.2,SN11可以在辅节点增加请求响应消息中携带SN11为终端21生成的配置信息,例如该配置信息可以是容器(container),该container中可以包括第二PDCP SN长度,但是此时并不要求MN01读取该container的内容,所以MN01不会读取携带在该container中的第二PDCP SN长度。You can refer to Section 9.1.3.2 of 3GPP TS36.423 and V15.1.0. SN11 can add the configuration response generated by SN11 for terminal 21 in the secondary node add request response message. For example, the configuration information can be a container. The container can be Including the second PDCP SN length, but at this time MN01 is not required to read the content of the container, so MN01 will not read the second PDCP SN length carried in the container.
这里可以通过定义新的信元或者将第二PDCP SN长度携带在MN01会读取的信元中,使得MN01去读取第二PDCP SN长度,从而MN01可以去判断PDCP SN长度是否发生了变化,从而为终端21生成第一承载的释放和增加的配置信息。Here, you can define a new cell or carry the second PDCP SN length in a cell that MN01 will read, so that MN01 reads the second PDCP SN length, so MN01 can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed. Thereby, the release and added configuration information of the first bearer is generated for the terminal 21.
S12b05:SN11向MN01发送第一承载的第一配置信息。S12b05: SN11 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to MN01.
可选的,S1204和S1205可以是同时发生的,例如第二PDCP SN长度和第一承载的第一配置信息可以通过同一条消息发送给MN01,例如辅节点增加请求响应消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息。Optionally, S1204 and S1205 can occur at the same time. For example, the second PDCP SN length and the first configuration information of the first bearer can be sent to MN01 in the same message, such as a secondary node addition request response message or a secondary node modification request response. Message.
S12b06:MN01向终端21发送第一承载的第一配置信息。S12b06: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
S12b07:MN01判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。S12b07: MN01 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,PDCP SN长度发生变化。When the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, the PDCP SN length changes.
作为第一种实施方式,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于SN,SN11可以向MN01发送第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度,具体可以参考S1203的相关内容。As a first embodiment, when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, the first bearer terminates at the SN, and SN11 can send the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer to MN01. For details, refer to the relevant part of S1203. content.
作为第二种实施方式,第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载终结于MN,MN01可以获取第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度。As a second implementation manner, when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the MN, and MN01 can obtain the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
S12b08:MN01为生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S12b08: MN01 is the second configuration information for generating the first bearer.
可以参考图8中S807的相关内容。For details, refer to S807 in FIG. 8.
S12b09:MN01向终端31发送第一承载的第二配置信息。S12b09: MN01 sends the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 31.
可以参考图8中S808的相关内容。For details, refer to S808 in FIG. 8.
可选的,S12b09和S12b06可以是同时发生的,例如SN11向MN01发送消息,消息包括第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息,例如,该消息是RRC连接重配置消息。Optionally, S12b09 and S12b06 can occur simultaneously. For example, SN11 sends a message to MN01. The message includes the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer. For example, the message is an RRC connection reconfiguration message. .
在第二种方案中,通过MN01和SN11分别取判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化,使得MN01和SN11为终端21生成该承载的释放和增加的配置信息,完成PDCP SN长度变更。另外,当PDCP SN长度存在3种以上可能性的时候,例如3种、4种或者更多,PDCP SN长度变化可以存在较多可能性,通过MN01和SN11都可以获知最新的PDCP SN长度,MN01和SN11可以较准确地判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。In the second scheme, MN01 and SN11 are respectively used to determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed, so that MN01 and SN11 generate the release and added configuration information of the bearer for the terminal 21 to complete the PDCP SN length change. In addition, when there are more than 3 possibilities for PDCP SN length, such as 3, 4, or more, there may be more possibilities for changes in PDCP SN length. Both MN01 and SN11 can know the latest PDCP SN length, MN01 And SN11 can more accurately determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed.
下面对第三方案进行说明。The third solution is described below.
可以配置承载类型对应的PDCP SN长度,MN01和SN11可以存储每种承载类型对应的PDCP SN长度,当承载类型发生变化时,MN01或者SN11可以知道PDCP SN长度是否发生变化,当发生变化时,MN01和SN11为终端21生成承载的释放和增加的配置信息。You can configure the PDCP SN length corresponding to the bearer type. MN01 and SN11 can store the PDCP SN length corresponding to each bearer type. When the bearer type changes, MN01 or SN11 can know whether the PDCP SN length has changed. When the change occurs, MN01 And SN11 generate release information and added configuration information for the bearer for the terminal 21.
例如,可以配置涉及单空口资源的承载,例如MN终结或者SN终结的MCG承载、MN终结或者SN终结的SCG承载为一种PDCP SN长度,例如12bit的PDCP SN长度;可以配置涉及双空口资源的承载,例如MN终结或者SN终结的split承载为另外一种PDCP SN长度,例如18bit的PDCP SN长度。下面结合这种情况为例进行说明,本领域技术人员可以理解的是,下面的内容同样适用于其他情况。For example, bearers involving single air interface resources can be configured, such as MN terminated or SN terminated MCG bearers, MN terminated or SN terminated SCG bearers are a PDCP SN length, such as 12-bit PDCP SN length; The bearer, such as the MN-terminated or SN-terminated split bearer, has a different PDCP SN length, such as an 18-bit PDCP SN length. The following description is made by taking such a case as an example. Those skilled in the art can understand that the following content is also applicable to other cases.
图13是改变PDCP SN长度的另一种实施方式的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of changing the length of PDCP and SN.
S1301:SN11判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。S1301: SN11 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
例如,SN11可以通过如下步骤进行判断:(1)判断第一承载的承载类型是否发生变化,(2)变化前的承载类型对应的PDCP SN长度与变化后的承载类型对应的PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。SN11可以从MN01接收第一承载的承载类型,例如可以通过辅节点增加请求消息、辅节点修改请求消息。For example, SN11 can be determined by the following steps: (1) determining whether the bearer type of the first bearer has changed, (2) whether the PDCP corresponding to the bearer type before the change and the PDCP SN length corresponding to the changed bearer type have occurred Variety. The SN11 may receive the bearer type of the first bearer from the MN01, for example, it may add a request message through a secondary node and modify the request message through a secondary node.
例如,第一承载的承载类型发生变化,变化前为MN终结的MCG承载,变化后为SN终结的split承载,SN11可知MN终结的MCG承载的PDCP SN长度为12bit,SN终结的split承载的PDCP SN长度为18bit,那么PDCP SN长度发生变化。For example, the bearer type of the first bearer changes. Before the change, the MCG bearer terminated by the MN and the split bearer terminated by the SN. SN11 shows that the PDCP length of the MCG bearer terminated by the MN is 12 bits. The SN length is 18 bits, so the PDCP SN length changes.
S1302:SN11为终端21生成第一承载的第一配置信息。S1302: SN11 generates first configuration information of the first bearer for the terminal 21.
当PDCP SN长度发生变化时,第一承载的第一配置信息可以包括SN11上的第一承载的实体的配置信息,例如,当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前在SN11上,在PDCP SN长度变化前不在SN11上,第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放信息;当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前在SN11上,在PDCP SN长度变化前在SN11上,第一配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息;当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前不在SN11上,在PDCP SN长度变化前在SN11上,第一配置信息可以包括该实体的增加信息,该实体可以是PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体。When the PDCP SN length changes, the first configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the first bearer entity on SN11. For example, when the entity is on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, before the PDCP SN length changes Not on SN11, the first configuration information may include the release information of the entity; when the entity is on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, and on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, the first configuration information may include the release and addition of the entity Configuration information; when the entity is not on SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes and on the SN11 before the PDCP SN length changes, the first configuration information may include additional information for the entity, and the entity may be a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity .
可以参考图8-图11中的相关内容。Please refer to the related content in FIG. 8 to FIG. 11.
S1303:SN11向MN01发送第一承载的第一配置信息。S1303: SN11 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to MN01.
例如,可以通过辅节点增加请求响应消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息发送第一承载的第一配置信息。For example, the first configuration information of the first bearer may be sent through the secondary node adding a request response message or the secondary node modifying a request response message.
S1304:MN01判断PDCP SN长度是否发生变化。S1304: MN01 determines whether the length of the PDCP SN changes.
可以参考S1301中的相关内容。You can refer to related content in S1301.
S1305:MN01为终端21生成第一承载的第二配置信息。S1305: MN01 generates second configuration information of the first bearer for the terminal 21.
当PDCP SN长度发生变化时,第一承载的第二配置信息可以包括MN01上的第一承载的实体的配置信息,例如,当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前在MN01上,在PDCP SN长度变化前不在MN01上,第二配置信息可以包括该实体的释放信息;当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前在MN01上,在PDCP SN长度变化前在MN01上,第二配置信息可以包括该实体的释放和增加的配置信息;当实体在PDCP SN长度变化前不在MN01上,在PDCP SN长度变化前在MN01上,第二置信息可以包括该实体的增加信息,该实体可以是PDCP实体、RLC实体或者MAC实体。When the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the first bearer entity on MN01. For example, when the entity is on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, before the PDCP SN length changes Not on MN01, the second configuration information may include the release information of the entity; when the entity is on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, and on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, the second configuration information may include the release and addition of the entity Configuration information; when the entity is not on MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes and on the MN01 before the PDCP SN length changes, the second set of information may include additional information about the entity, and the entity may be a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, or a MAC entity .
可以参考图8-图11中的相关内容。Please refer to the related content in FIG. 8 to FIG. 11.
S1306:MN01向终端21发送第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。S1306: MN01 sends the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21.
例如,可以通过RRC连接重配置消息发送第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。For example, the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer may be sent through the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
在三种方案中,MN01或者SN11可以采用CU-DU架构,部分协议层可以部署在CU上,部分协议层可以部署在DU上,下面以PDCP层部署在CU上,RLC层、MAC层、物理层部署在DU上为例进行说明。In the three solutions, MN01 or SN11 can adopt the CU-DU architecture. Part of the protocol layer can be deployed on the CU. Part of the protocol layer can be deployed on the DU. The PDCP layer is deployed on the CU below. The RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical The layer is deployed on the DU as an example.
本申请实施例中,由SN11发送或者接收的动作可以由CU1111执行。由SN11生 成的第一承载的第一配置信息中的PDCP实体的配置信息由CU1111生成,第一配置信息中的RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC实体的配置信息由DU1121生成。In the embodiment of the present application, the action sent or received by the SN11 may be performed by the CU1111. The configuration information of the PDCP entity in the first configuration information of the first bearer generated by the SN11 is generated by the CU1111, and the configuration information of the RLC entity or the configuration information of the MAC entity in the first configuration information is generated by the DU1121.
CU1111可以生成PDCP SN长度变更指示,CU1111可以向DU1121发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变更指示,DU1121根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC的配置信息。CU1111可以向MN01,例如CU0111发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。CU1111 can generate a PDCP SN length change instruction, CU1111 can send a PDCP SN length change instruction to the DU1121, and DU1121 generates RLC entity configuration information or MAC configuration information according to the PDCP SN length change instruction of the first bearer. The CU1111 may send a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN01, for example, CU0111.
CU1111可以生成PDCP SN长度,CU1111可以向DU1121发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度,DU1121根据接收到的第一承载的PDCP SN长度,判断PDCP SN长度是否发生了改变,生成RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC的配置信息。CU1111可以向MN01,例如向CU0111发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度。CU1111 can generate the PDCP SN length, CU1111 can send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU1121, and DU1121 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and generates configuration information or MAC of the RLC entity Configuration information. The CU1111 may send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to the MN01, for example, to the CU0111.
本申请实施例中,由MN01发送或者接收的动作可以由CU0111执行。由MN01生成的第一承载的第二配置信息中的PDCP实体的配置信息由CU0111生成,第二配置信息中的RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC实体的配置信息由DU0121生成,CU0111可以向DU0112发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变更指示,DU0112根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变更指示,生成RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC的配置信息。CU0111可以从SN11,例如CU1111接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,然后可以向DU0112发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变更指示。In the embodiment of the present application, the action sent or received by MN01 may be performed by CU0111. The configuration information of the PDCP entity in the second configuration information of the first bearer generated by MN01 is generated by CU0111, and the configuration information of the RLC entity or MAC entity in the second configuration information is generated by DU0121. CU0111 can send the first The PDCP SN length change instruction of one bearer, DU0112 generates configuration information of the RLC entity or MAC configuration information according to the PDCP SN length change instruction of the first bearer. CU0111 may receive a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer from SN11, for example, CU1111, and then may send a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to DU0112.
CU0111可以生成PDCP SN长度,CU0111可以向DU0121发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度,DU0121根据接收到的第一承载的PDCP SN长度,判断PDCP SN长度是否发生了改变,生成RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC的配置信息。CU0111可以向SN11,例如向CU1111发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度。CU0111 can generate the PDCP SN length, CU0111 can send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU0121, and DU0121 determines whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and generates configuration information or MAC of the RLC entity Configuration information. CU0111 may send the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to SN11, for example, to CU1111.
图14是CU-DU架构下改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图。以CU1111和DU1121为例进行说明,本领域技术人员可以理解,同样适用于CU0111和DU0121。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of changing a PDCP SN length under a CU-DU architecture. Taking CU1111 and DU1121 as examples for description, those skilled in the art can understand that the same applies to CU0111 and DU0121.
S1401:CU1111生成PDCP实体的配置信息。S1401: CU1111 generates configuration information of the PDCP entity.
S1402:CU1111向DU1121发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。S1402: CU1111 sends a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to DU1121.
或者,作为另一种实施方式,在1402中,CU1111向DU1121发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度,CU1111可以将第一承载的PDCP SN长度携带在DU1121读取的信元中,例如CU1111可以定义一个新的信元,该新的信元携带第一承载的PDCP SN长度,DU1121从该信元中读取第一承载的PDCP SN长度。Or, as another embodiment, in 1402, CU1111 sends the PDCP SN length of the first bearer to DU1121, and CU1111 may carry the PDCP SN length of the first bearer in the cell read by DU1121. For example, CU1111 may define a A new cell, which carries the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and the DU1121 reads the PDCP SN length of the first bearer from the cell.
S1403:DU1121生成RLC实体的配置信息和MAC实体的配置信息。S1403: DU1121 generates configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity.
DU1121可以根据PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成RLC实体的配置信息和MAC实体的配置信息。The DU1121 can generate configuration information of the RLC entity and configuration information of the MAC entity according to the PDCP SN length change indication.
作为另一种实施方式,DU1121可以读取CU1111发送的PDCP SN长度,DU1121可以根据接收到的第一承载的PDCP SN长度,判断PDCP SN长度是否发生了改变,若发生了改变,生成RLC实体的配置信息或者MAC的配置信息。As another implementation manner, DU1121 can read the PDCP SN length sent by CU1111, and DU1121 can determine whether the PDCP SN length has changed based on the received PDCP SN length of the first bearer. Configuration information or MAC configuration information.
S1404:DU1121向CU1111发送RLC实体的配置信息和MAC实体的配置信息。S1404: DU1121 sends the configuration information of the RLC entity and the configuration information of the MAC entity to the CU1111.
这里PDCP实体的配置信息可以包括本申请实施例中的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息、增加的配置信息或者释放和增加的配置信息。Here, the configuration information of the PDCP entity may include released configuration information, added configuration information, or released and added configuration information of the PDCP entity in the embodiments of the present application.
这里RLC实体的配置信息可以包括本申请实施例中的RLC实体的释放的配置信 息、增加的配置信息或者释放和增加的配置信息。Here, the configuration information of the RLC entity may include the released configuration information, the added configuration information, or the released and added configuration information of the RLC entity in the embodiments of the present application.
这里MAC实体的配置信息可以包括本申请实施例中的MAC实体的释放的配置信息、增加的配置信息或者释放和增加的配置信息。Here, the configuration information of the MAC entity may include released configuration information, added configuration information, or released and added configuration information of the MAC entity in the embodiments of the present application.
具体可以参考图8-图13中的相关内容,在此不再赘述。For details, reference may be made to related content in FIG. 8 to FIG. 13, and details are not described herein again.
上面介绍了本申请实施例的方法流程图,要理解的是,MN01可以存在与MN01方法或者流程的步骤对应的功能单元,SN11可以存在与SN11方法或者流程的步骤对应的功能单元。The method flowchart of the embodiment of the present application is introduced above. It should be understood that MN01 may have functional units corresponding to the MN01 method or process steps, and SN11 may have functional units corresponding to the SN11 method or process steps.
例如,SN11可以包括生成单元和通信单元,该生成单元可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,该生成单元还可以当所述第一承载的所述第二PDCP SN长度不同于所述第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度时,生成所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,该通信单元可以向MN发送所述第一承载的所述PDCP SN长度变化指示。可选的,该生成单元还可以用于生成第一承载的第一配置信息,该通信单元用于向MN01发送第一承载的第一配置信息。For example, SN11 may include a generating unit and a communication unit, and the generating unit may generate a second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and the generating unit may also be configured when the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP When the first PDCP SN length of a bearer is generated, the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer is generated, and the communication unit may send the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the MN. Optionally, the generating unit may be further configured to generate first configuration information of the first bearer, and the communication unit is configured to send the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN01.
例如,SN11可以包括通信单元和保存单元,该通信单元可以用于从SN接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,保存单元可以用于保存第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示。可选的,SN11还可以包括生成单元,该生成单元可以用于生成第一承载的第二配置信息,该通信单元可以向终端21发送第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。For example, SN11 may include a communication unit and a storage unit. The communication unit may be used to receive a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer from the SN, and the storage unit may be used to store the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer. Optionally, the SN11 may further include a generating unit, which may be configured to generate the second configuration information of the first bearer, and the communication unit may send the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal 21 Configuration information.
下面介绍本申请实施例中的设备或者装置。The following describes the device or device in the embodiments of the present application.
图15为一种接入网设备的结构示意图。MN01或者SN11可以参考图15所示的结构。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device. MN01 or SN11 may refer to the structure shown in FIG. 15.
接入网设备包括至少一个处理器1511、至少一个存储器1512、至少一个收发器1513、至少一个网络接口1514和一个或多个天线1515。处理器1511、存储器1512、收发器1513和网络接口1514相连,例如通过总线相连。天线1515与收发器1513相连。网络接口1514用于使得接入网设备通过通信链路,与其它通信设备相连,例如接入网设备通过S1接口,与核心网网元101相连。在本申请实施例中,所述连接可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等,本实施例对此不做限定。The access network device includes at least one processor 1511, at least one memory 1512, at least one transceiver 1513, at least one network interface 1514, and one or more antennas 1515. The processor 1511, the memory 1512, the transceiver 1513, and the network interface 1514 are connected, for example, through a bus. The antenna 1515 is connected to the transceiver 1513. The network interface 1514 is used to enable the access network device to connect with other communication devices through a communication link, for example, the access network device is connected to the core network element 101 through an S1 interface. In the embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines, or buses, which is not limited in this embodiment.
本申请实施例中的处理器,例如处理器1511,可以包括如下至少一种类型:通用中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、微控制器(Microcontroller Unit,MCU)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、或者用于实现逻辑运算的集成电路。例如,处理器1111可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器或多核(multi-CPU)处理器。至少一个处理器1111可以是集成在一个芯片中或位于多个不同的芯片上。The processor in the embodiment of the present application, such as the processor 1511, may include at least one of the following types: a general-purpose central processing unit (Central Processing Unit), a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), a microprocessor, Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Microcontroller Unit (MCU), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or integrated circuit for implementing logic operations . For example, the processor 1111 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor. The at least one processor 1111 may be integrated in one chip or located on multiple different chips.
本申请实施例中的存储器,例如存储器1512,可以包括如下至少一种类型:只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically erasable programmabler-only memory,EEPROM)。在某些场景下,存储器还可以是只读光盘 (compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。The memory in the embodiment of the present application, such as the memory 1512, may include at least one of the following types: read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, and can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). In some scenarios, the memory can also be a compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other disc storage, disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.) , Magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
存储器1512可以是独立存在,与处理器1511相连。可选的,存储器1512也可以和处理器1511集成在一起,例如集成在一个芯片之内。其中,存储器1512能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码,并由处理器1511来控制执行,被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1511的驱动程序。例如,处理器1511用于执行存储器1512中存储的计算机程序代码,从而实现本申请实施例中的技术方案。The memory 1512 may exist independently and is connected to the processor 1511. Optionally, the memory 1512 may also be integrated with the processor 1511, for example, integrated in a chip. The memory 1512 can store program code that executes the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and is controlled and executed by the processor 1511. The executed computer program codes can also be regarded as the driver program of the processor 1511. For example, the processor 1511 is configured to execute computer program code stored in the memory 1512, so as to implement the technical solution in the embodiment of the present application.
收发器1513可以用于支持接入网设备与终端之间射频信号的接收或者发送,收发器1513可以与天线1515相连。收发器1513包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地,一个或多个天线1515可以接收射频信号,该收发器1513的接收机Rx用于从天线接收所述射频信号,并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给所述处理器1511,以便处理器1511对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理,例如解调处理和译码处理。此外,收发器1513中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1511接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号,并通过一个或多个天线1515发送所述射频信号。具体地,接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号,所述下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号,所述上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。The transceiver 1513 may be used to support reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the access network device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1513 may be connected to the antenna 1515. The transceiver 1513 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1515 may receive a radio frequency signal, and a receiver Rx of the transceiver 1513 is configured to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and convert the digital The baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1511, so that the processor 1511 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing. In addition, the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1513 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1511, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a Or multiple antennas 1515 send the radio frequency signal. Specifically, the receiver Rx may selectively perform one or more levels of downmix processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal. The sequence is adjustable. The transmitter Tx may selectively perform one or more levels of upmixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal. The upmixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing The sequence is adjustable. Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
当该接入网设备是SN11时候,该接入网设备可以实现本申请实施例中由SN11执行的方法,例如,处理器1111可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示,第一承载的第一配置信息,处理器1111可以通过网络接口1114向MN01发送第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示和第一承载的第一配置信息,存储器1112可以存储第一承载的PDCP SN长度,例如第一PDCP SN长度和/或第二PDCP SN长度。接入网设备通过其组件实现的其他步骤可以参考本申请实施例的由SN11执行的方法,在此不再赘述。When the access network device is SN11, the access network device can implement the method performed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the processor 1111 can generate a second PDCP length of the first bearer and a PDCP of the first bearer. SN length change indication, the first configuration information of the first bearer, the processor 1111 may send the PDCP of the first bearer to the MN01 through the network interface 1114, the SN length change indication and the first configuration information of the first bearer, and the memory 1112 may store the first The length of the PDCP SN carried, such as the length of the first PDCP SN and / or the length of the second PDCP SN. For other steps implemented by the access network device through its components, reference may be made to the method performed by the SN11 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
当该接入网设备是MN01时候,该接入网设备可以实现本申请实施例中由MN01执行的方法,例如,可以通过网络接口1114接收第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示和第一承载的第一配置信息,处理器1111可以根据第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示生成第一承载的第二配置信息,天线1115可以向终端21发送第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息,存储器1112可以存储第一承载的PDCP SN长度,例如第一PDCP SN长度和/或第二PDCP SN长度。接入网设备通过其组件实现的其他步骤可以参考本申请实施例的由MN01执行的方法,在此不再赘述。When the access network device is MN01, the access network device can implement the method performed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application. For example, it can receive the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer and the first bearer through the network interface 1114. The first configuration information, the processor 1111 may generate the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length indication of the first bearer, and the antenna 1115 may send the first configuration information of the first bearer and the first bearer first configuration information to the terminal 21. Second configuration information, the memory 1112 may store the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the first PDCP SN length and / or the second PDCP SN length. For other steps implemented by the access network device through its components, reference may be made to the method performed by the MN01 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
如图16所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图。终端21的结构可以参考图16所示的结构。As shown in FIG. 16, it is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application. For the structure of the terminal 21, reference may be made to the structure shown in FIG.
终端包括至少一个处理器1611、至少一个收发器1612和至少一个存储器1613。处理器1611、存储器1613和收发器1612相连。可选的,终端21还可以包括输出设备1614、输入设备1615和一个或多个天线1616。天线1616与收发器1612相连,输出设备1614、输入设备1615与处理器1611相连。The terminal includes at least one processor 1611, at least one transceiver 1612, and at least one memory 1613. The processor 1611, the memory 1613, and the transceiver 1612 are connected. Optionally, the terminal 21 may further include an output device 1614, an input device 1615, and one or more antennas 1616. The antenna 1616 is connected to the transceiver 1612, and the output device 1614 and the input device 1615 are connected to the processor 1611.
收发器1612、存储器1613以及天线1616可以参考图15中的相关描述,实现类似功能。For the transceiver 1612, the memory 1613, and the antenna 1616, reference may be made to the related description in FIG. 15 to implement similar functions.
处理器1611可以是基带处理器,也可以是CPU,基带处理器和CPU可以集成在一起,或者分开。The processor 1611 may be a baseband processor or a CPU. The baseband processor and the CPU may be integrated or separated.
处理器1611可以用于为终端实现各种功能,例如用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,或者用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据;或者用于协助完成计算处理任务,例如对图形图像处理或者音频处理等等;或者处理器1211用于实现上述功能中的一种或者多种The processor 1611 may be used to implement various functions for the terminal, for example, to process communication protocols and communication data, or to control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process data of the software program; or to assist completion Calculation processing tasks, such as graphics and image processing or audio processing; or the processor 1211 is used to implement one or more of the above functions
输出设备1614和处理器1611通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备1214可以是液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、发光二级管(Light Emitting Diode,LED)显示设备、阴极射线管(Cathode Ray Tube,CRT)显示设备、或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备1615和处理器1611通信,可以以多种方式接受用户的输入。例如,输入设备1615可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。The output device 1614 communicates with the processor 1611 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 1214 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector. Wait. The input device 1615 communicates with the processor 1611 and can accept user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 1615 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensing device.
当该终端是终端21时候,该接入网设备可以实现本申请实施例中由终端21执行的方法,例如,可以通过天线1616从MN01接收第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息。终端通过其组件实现的其他步骤可以参考本申请实施例的由终端21执行的方法,在此不再赘述。When the terminal is the terminal 21, the access network device may implement the method performed by the terminal 21 in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the first configuration information of the first bearer and the first configuration of the first bearer may be received from the MN01 through the antenna 1616. Second configuration information. For other steps implemented by the terminal through its components, reference may be made to the method performed by the terminal 21 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
如图17所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种装置1700的结构示意图。As shown in FIG. 17, it is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
通信装置1700包括处理器1701、通信接口1702,处理器1701和通信接口1702相连,可选的,通信装置1700还可以包括存储器1703,存储器1703和处理器1701、通信接口1702相连。The communication device 1700 includes a processor 1701, a communication interface 1702, and the processor 1701 is connected to the communication interface 1702. Optionally, the communication device 1700 may further include a memory 1703, and the memory 1703 is connected to the processor 1701 and the communication interface 1702.
处理器1701,可以包括如下至少一种类型:通用中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、微控制器(Microcontroller Unit,MCU)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、或者用于实现逻辑运算的集成电路。例如,处理器1711可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器或多核(multi-CPU)处理器。至少一个处理器1711可以是集成在一个芯片中或位于多个不同的芯片上。The processor 1701 may include at least one of the following types: a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, and an application-specific integrated circuit (Application-Specific Integrated Circuit) Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), microcontroller (MCU), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or integrated circuit for implementing logic operations. For example, the processor 1711 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor. The at least one processor 1711 may be integrated in one chip or located on multiple different chips.
存储器1703,可以包括如下至少一种类型:只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically erasable programmabler-only memory,EEPROM)。在某些场景下,存储器还可以是只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数 据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。The memory 1703 may include at least one of the following types: read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or Other types of dynamic storage devices that store information and instructions can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memories (EEPROMs). In some scenarios, the memory can also be a compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other disc storage, disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.) , Magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
通信接口1702可以是具有收发功能,用于与其他通信装置或者通信装置中的其他器件进行通信。The communication interface 1702 may have a transmitting and receiving function, and is configured to communicate with other communication devices or other devices in the communication device.
存储器1703可以独立存在,通过通信总线与处理器1701相连。存储器1703也可以与处理器1701集成在一起。The memory 1703 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 1701 through a communication bus. The memory 1703 may also be integrated with the processor 1701.
装置1700可以是MN(例如MN01)、MN(例如MN01)中的芯片、SN(例如SN11)、SN(例如SN11)中的芯片、CU(例如CU0111或者CU1111)、CU(例如CU0111或者CU1111)中的芯片、DU(例如DU0121或者DU1121)中的芯片。The device 1700 may be a MN (e.g. MN01), a chip in MN (e.g. MN01), a SN (e.g. SN11), a chip in SN (e.g. SN11), a CU (e.g. CU0111 or CU1111), a CU (e.g. CU0111 or CU1111) Chip, DU (such as DU0121 or DU1121).
当装置1700是MN01或者MN01中的芯片时,存储器1703中可以存储有本申请实施例中的由MN01执行的方法的指令和数据,处理器1701可以读取存储器1703中的方法指令和数据并运行,从而实现本申请实施例中由MN01执行的方法。当装置1700是MN01时,通信接口1703可以包括与其他接入网设备的接口,例如与SN11之间的接口,通信接口还可以包括天线和收发机,例如图15中的天线1515和收发机1513,当装置1700是MN01中的芯片时,通信接收1703可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等,处理器1701和存储器1703可以集成在一起。When the device 1700 is a chip in MN01 or MN01, the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may read the method instructions and data in the memory 1703 and run , So as to implement the method executed by MN01 in the embodiment of the present application. When the device 1700 is MN01, the communication interface 1703 may include interfaces with other access network devices, such as an interface with SN11, and the communication interface may further include an antenna and a transceiver, such as the antenna 1515 and the transceiver 1513 in FIG. 15 When the device 1700 is a chip in the MN01, the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit, and the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
当装置1700是SN11或者SN11中的芯片时,存储器1703中可以存储有本申请实施例中的由SN11执行的方法的指令和数据,处理器1701可以读取存储器1703中的方法指令和数据并运行,从而实现本申请实施例中由SN11执行的方法。当装置1700是SN11时,通信接口1703可以包括与其他接入网设备的接口,例如与MN01之间的接口,通信接口还可以包括天线和收发机,例如图15中的天线1515和收发机1513,当装置1700是SN11中的芯片时,通信接收1703可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等,处理器1701和存储器1703可以集成在一起。When the device 1700 is a chip in SN11 or SN11, the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may read the method instructions and data in the memory 1703 and run , So as to implement the method executed by SN11 in the embodiment of the present application. When the device 1700 is SN11, the communication interface 1703 may include interfaces with other access network devices, such as an interface with MN01, and the communication interface may further include an antenna and a transceiver, such as the antenna 1515 and the transceiver 1513 in FIG. 15 When the device 1700 is a chip in the SN11, the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit, and the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
当装置1700是CU0111(或者CU1111)或者CU1111(或者CU1111)中的芯片时,存储器1703中可以存储有本申请实施例中的由CU0111(或者CU1111)执行的方法的指令和数据,处理器1701可以读取存储器1703中的方法指令和数据并运行,从而实现本申请实施例中由CU0111(或者CU1111)执行的方法。当装置1700是CU0111(或者CU1111)时,通信接口1703可以包括和DU0121(或者DU1121)之间的接口,还可以包括与CU1111(或者CU0111)之间的接口;当装置1700是CU0111(或者CU1111)中的芯片时,通信接收1703可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等,处理器1701和存储器1703可以集成在一起。When the device 1700 is a chip in CU0111 (or CU1111) or CU1111 (or CU1111), the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by CU0111 (or CU1111) in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may The method instructions and data in the memory 1703 are read and run, thereby implementing the method executed by CU0111 (or CU1111) in the embodiment of the present application. When the device 1700 is CU0111 (or CU1111), the communication interface 1703 may include an interface with DU0121 (or DU1121), and may also include an interface with CU1111 (or CU0111); when the device 1700 is CU0111 (or CU1111) When the chip is installed, the communication receiving 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc. The processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
当装置1700是DU0121(或者DU1121)或者DU0121(或者DU1121)中的芯片时,存储器1703中可以存储有本申请实施例中的由DU0121(或者DU1121)执行的方法的指令和数据,处理器1701可以读取存储器1703中的方法指令和数据并运行,从而实现本申请实施例中由DU0121(或者DU1121)执行的方法。当装置1700是DU0121(或者DU1121)时,通信接口1703可以包括与CU0111(或者CU1111)之间的接口,还可以包括收发机和天线,收发机和天线可以用于向终端21发送或者从终端21接收数据,例如第一承载的第一配置信息和第一承载的第二配置信息;当装置1700是CU0111(或者CU1111)中的芯片时,通信接收1703可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等,处理器1701和存储器1703可以集成在一起。When the device 1700 is a chip in DU0121 (or DU1121) or DU0121 (or DU1121), the memory 1703 may store instructions and data of the method executed by DU0121 (or DU1121) in the embodiment of the present application, and the processor 1701 may The method instructions and data in the memory 1703 are read and run, thereby implementing the method executed by DU0121 (or DU1121) in the embodiment of the present application. When the device 1700 is DU0121 (or DU1121), the communication interface 1703 may include an interface with CU0111 (or CU1111), and may further include a transceiver and an antenna. The transceiver and the antenna may be used to send to or from the terminal 21 Receive data, such as the first configuration information of the first bearer and the second configuration information of the first bearer; when the device 1700 is a chip in CU0111 (or CU1111), the communication reception 1703 may be an input or output interface, a pin, or a circuit Etc., the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 may be integrated together.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。上述方法实施例中描述的方法可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。如果在软件中实现,则功能可以作为一个或多个指令或代码存储在计算机可读介质上或者在计算机可读介质上传输。计算机可读介质可以包括计算机存储介质和通信介质,还可以包括任何可以将计算机程序从一个地方传送到另一个地方的介质。存储介质可以是可由计算机访问的任何可用介质。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium. The methods described in the foregoing method embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium. Computer-readable media can include computer storage media and communication media, and can also include any medium that can transfer computer programs from one place to another. A storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer.
作为一种可选的设计,计算机可读介质可以包括RAM,ROM,EEPROM,CD-ROM或其他光盘存储器,磁盘存储器或其他磁存储设备,或可用于承载的任何其他介质或以指令或数据结构的形式存储所需的程序代码,并且可由计算机访问。而且,任何连接被适当地称为计算机可读介质。例如,如果使用同轴电缆,光纤电缆,双绞线,数字用户线(DSL)或无线技术(如红外,无线电和微波)从网节点,服务器或其他远程源传输软件,则同轴电缆,光纤电缆,双绞线,DSL或诸如红外,无线电和微波之类的无线技术包括在介质的定义中。如本文所使用的磁盘和光盘包括光盘(CD),激光盘,光盘,数字通用光盘(DVD),软盘和蓝光盘,其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据,而光盘利用激光光学地再现数据。上述的组合也应包括在计算机可读介质的范围内。As an optional design, the computer-readable medium may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or with instructions or data structures The required program code is stored in a form and can be accessed by a computer. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if you use coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology (such as infrared, radio, and microwave) to transmit software from a network node, server, or other remote source, coaxial cable, fiber optic Cable, twisted pair, DSL or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio and microwave are included in the definition of the medium. Magnetic disks and optical discs as used herein include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), floppy discs, and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, and optical discs use lasers to reproduce data optically. Combinations of the foregoing should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品。上述方法实施例中描述的方法可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。如果在软件中实现,可以全部或者部分得通过计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行上述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照上述方法实施例中描述的流程或功能。上述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product. The methods described in the foregoing method embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the procedures or functions described in the foregoing method embodiments are generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or another programmable device.
下面图18-图20介绍了一种改变PDCP SN长度的方案,在该方案中,当PDCP SN长度变化,MN01可以为承载分配一个新的承载标识,然后MN01和SN11生成该承载的旧承载标识对应的实体的释放的配置信息,和该承载的新承载标识对应的实体的增加的配置信息,终端21执行该承载的旧承载标识对应的实体的释放和该承载的新承载标识对应的实体的增加。下面从主节点的角度和辅节点的角度描述该方法。Figure 18-20 below introduces a scheme for changing the length of PDCP and SN. In this scheme, when PDCP SN length changes, MN01 can assign a new bearer identifier to the bearer, and then MN01 and SN11 generate the old bearer identifier of the bearer. The release configuration information of the corresponding entity and the added configuration information of the entity corresponding to the new bearer identifier of the bearer, the terminal 21 executes the release of the entity corresponding to the old bearer identifier of the bearer and the entity corresponding to the new bearer identifier of the bearer. increase. The method is described below from the perspective of the primary node and the secondary node.
下面M1方法可以由主节点或者主节点中的芯片执行,该M1方法包括:The following M1 method can be executed by a master node or a chip in the master node. The M1 method includes:
M101:获取第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。M101: Obtain the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以是主节点生成或者确定的,或者第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以是从辅节点接收的。Optionally, the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be generated or determined by the master node, or the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be received from the secondary node.
M102:当第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度,确定第一承载的第二承载标识。M102: When the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer, determine the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以为获取第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度之前,主节点存储的第一承载的长度。The first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the length of the first bearer stored by the master node before the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is obtained.
可选的,第一承载的第二承载标识不同于第一承载的第一承载标识。Optionally, the second bearer identifier of the first bearer is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的第一承载标识可以为第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,第一承载的承载标识。Optionally, the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be the bearer identifier of the first bearer when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first PDCP SN length.
可选的,第一承载的第一承载标识可以为主节点存储的第一承载的承载标识。Optionally, the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be the bearer identifier of the first bearer stored by the master node.
M103:向辅节点发送第一承载的第二承载标识。M103: Send the second bearer identifier of the first bearer to the secondary node.
可选的,该方法还可以包括M104-M106。Optionally, the method may further include M104-M106.
M104:从辅节点接收第一承载的辅节点配置信息。M104: Receive the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer from the secondary node.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识对应的辅节点上的实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include increased configuration information of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的辅节点上的实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
M105:生成第一承载的主节点配置信息。M105: Generate master node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识对应的主节点上的实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include added configuration information of entities on the master node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的主节点上的实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the entity on the master node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
M106:向终端发送第一承载的辅节点配置信息和第一承载的主节点配置信息。M106: Send the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer and the primary node configuration information of the first bearer to the terminal.
下面M2方法可以由辅节点或者辅节点中的芯片执行。The following M2 method can be executed by a secondary node or a chip in the secondary node.
M201:确定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。M201: Determine the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
M201是可选的。M201 is optional.
M202:从主节点接收第一承载的第二承载标识。M202: Receive the second bearer identifier of the first bearer from the master node.
M203:向主节点发送第一承载的辅节点配置信息。M203: Send the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer to the primary node.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识对应的辅节点上的实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include increased configuration information of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的辅节点上的实体的释放的配置信息。Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of an entity on the secondary node corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
下面结合图18-图20做进一步的介绍。The following is further described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20.
图18为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图,其中以EN-DC场景为例。FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing a PDCP SN length, where an EN-DC scenario is taken as an example.
S1801:MN01向SN11发送第一请求消息。S1801: MN01 sends a first request message to SN11.
可选的,第一请求消息可以是第一辅节点增加请求消息或者第一辅节点修改请求消息。Optionally, the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message or a first secondary node modification request message.
例如,第一请求消息可以是第一辅节点增加请求消息,在MN01向SN11发送辅节点增加请求消息之前,第一承载的承载类型可以是MN终结的MCG承载,MN01可以决定增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型,增加辅节点后第一承载可以终结于SN,即增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,例如,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message. Before the MN01 sends a secondary node addition request message to the SN11, the bearer type of the first bearer may be an MCG bearer terminated by the MN, and MN01 may decide to add a secondary node. The bearer type of a bearer. The first bearer can be terminated at the SN after adding the secondary node, that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. For example, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is SN terminated MCG Bearer, SN terminated SCG bearer or SN terminated split bearer.
例如,第一请求消息可以是第一辅节点修改请求消息,第一辅节点修改请求消息可以指示修改第一承载的承载类型,在MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息之前,第一承载的承载类型可以终结于MN或者终结于SN,MN01可以决定修改第一承载的承载类型,修改承载类型后第一承载可以终结于SN,即增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,例如,增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载、SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载。For example, the first request message may be a first secondary node modification request message, and the first secondary node modification request message may indicate a modification of the bearer type of the first bearer. Before the MN01 sends the secondary node modification request message to the SN11, the bearer of the first bearer is modified. The type can be terminated at the MN or SN. MN01 can decide to modify the bearer type of the first bearer. After modifying the bearer type, the first bearer can be terminated at the SN, that is, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is at SN11. The bearer type of the first bearer after the secondary node is added is an SN terminated MCG bearer, an SN terminated SCG bearer, or an SN terminated split bearer.
第一请求消息可以包括:The first request message may include:
(1)MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的标识(identifier,ID)。(1) The identifier (ID) on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the MN01 to the terminal 21.
该接口为MN01与SN11之间的接口。This interface is the interface between MN01 and SN11.
其中,MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID用于在MN01与SN11之间的接口上标识终端21。The ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 is used to identify the terminal 21 on the interface between the MN01 and the SN11.
例如,在EN-DC场景下,MN01与SN11之间的接口为X2接口,MN01为终端21分配的在接口的ID为X2应用协议(application protocol,AP)ID。For example, in the EN-DC scenario, the interface between MN01 and SN11 is an X2 interface, and the ID assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 at the interface is an X2 application protocol (AP) ID.
再例如,在NGEN-DC、NR-DC和NR及E-UTRA的双连接(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity,NE-DC)场景下,MN01和SN11之间的接口为Xn接口,MN01为终端21分配的在接口上的ID为XnAP ID。需要说明的是,NR-DC中,核心网网元31为5GC,MN01为gNB,SN11为gNB。NGEN-DC和NE-DC中,核心网网元31都是5GC。For another example, in the NGEN-DC, NR-DC and NR and E-UTRA dual connection (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity, NE-DC) scenario, the interface between MN01 and SN11 is the Xn interface, and MN01 is the terminal 21 The ID assigned on the interface is XnAP ID. It should be noted that in the NR-DC, the core network element 31 is 5GC, MN01 is gNB, and SN11 is gNB. In NGEN-DC and NE-DC, the core network element 31 is 5GC.
(2)第一承载的演进型通用陆地无线接入网(evolved universal terrestrial radio access network,E-UTRAN)无线接入承载(E-UTRAN radio access bearer,E-RAB)ID。(2) Evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) radio bearer (E-UTRAN) radio access bearer (E-RAB) ID of the first bearer.
(3)第一承载的第一承载标识。(3) The first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
(4)修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型的指示信息。(4) The indication information of the bearer type of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified.
例如,可以包括增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体是否在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载是否存在MCG资源,增加辅节点后第一承载的是否存在SCG资源。For example, it may include whether the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11, whether the MCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and whether the SCG resource exists on the first bearer after adding the secondary node.
例如,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载存在MCG资源,不存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载;或者,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载不存在MCG资源,存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载;或者,增加辅节点后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,增加辅节点后第一承载存在MCG资源,存在SCG资源,即增加辅节点后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的split承载。For example, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. MCG resources exist in the first bearer after adding the secondary node, and there is no SCG resource, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is the SN terminated MCG bearer. Alternatively, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. There is no MCG resource and SCG resource for the first bearer after adding the secondary node, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated SCG bearer. Alternatively, the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is on SN11. The first bearer after adding the secondary node has MCG resources and SCG resources, that is, the bearer type of the first bearer after adding the secondary node is an SN terminated split bearer.
(5)修改承载类型前第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息。(5) Modify the configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer before the bearer type.
例如,在增加SN11前,第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息为MN终结的MCG承载的PDCP实体的配置信息。For example, before adding SN11, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN, and the configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer is the configuration information of the PDCP entity carried by the MN terminated MCG.
修改承载类型前第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息可以用于辅助SN11生成新的PDCP实体的配置信息。The configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified may be used to assist the SN11 in generating the configuration information of the new PDCP entity.
修改承载类型前第一承载的PDCP实体的配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度,例如第一PDCP SN长度可以是12bit,第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度为增加SN11前第一承载的PDCP SN长度。The configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer before modifying the bearer type may include the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, for example, the first PDCP SN length may be 12 bits, and the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the first before adding SN11. PDCP SN length of the bearer.
这里第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以包括第一承载的第一上行PDCP SN长度和第一承载的第一下行PDCP SN长度中的一种或者两种,例如第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第一上行PDCP SN长度;或者,第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第一下行PDCP SN长度;或者,第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第一上行PDCP SN长度和第一承载的第一下行PDCP SN长度。第一承载的第一上行PDCP SN长度为增加SN11前第一承载的上行PDCP SN长度;第一承载的第一下行PDCP SN长度为增加SN11前第一承载的下行PDCP SN长度。Here, the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may include one or two of the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the first PDCP of the first bearer. The SN length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the first PDCP SN of the first bearer The length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer. The first uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before SN11 is increased; the first downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before SN11 is increased.
例如,当第一请求消息是第一辅节点增加请求消息时,第一辅节点增加请求消息 可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)技术规范(Technical Specification,TS)36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.4.1中“辅gNB增加请求”(“SGNB ADDITION REQUEST”)的相关内容,例如,上述信息(2)(3)可以通过“SGNB ADDITION REQUEST”中的“待增加的E-RAB项目”(“E-RABs To Be Added Item”)中的信元“E-RAB ID”和信元“数据无线承载标识”(“DRB ID”)携带。For example, when the first request message is a first secondary node addition request message, the first secondary node addition request message may refer to the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Technical Specification (TS) 36.423 V15 .1.0 Section 9.1.4.1 related to the "auxiliary gNB addition request" ("SGNB ADDITION REQUEST"), for example, the above information (2) (3) can be obtained through "SGNB ADDITION REQUEST" "to be added E- The cell "E-RAB Item" and the cell "Data Radio Bearer ID" ("DRB ID") in the "RAB Item" ("E-RABs") are carried.
例如,当第一请求消息是第一辅节点修改请求消息时,第一辅节点修改请求消息可以参考3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.4.5中“SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST”的相关内容,例如,上述信息(2)(3)可以通过“辅gNB修改请求”(“SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST”)中的“E-RABs To Be Added Item”中的信元“E-RAB ID”和信元“DRB ID携带。For example, when the first request message is the first secondary node modification request message, the first secondary node modification request message can refer to the relevant content of "SGNB Modification Certificate" in section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0, for example, the above Information (2) (3) can be carried by the cell "E-RAB ID" and the cell "DRB ID" in the "E-RABs To Be Added Item" in the "SGNB Modification Request".
S1802:SN11确定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S1802: SN11 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度为增加SN11后第一承载的PDCP SN长度。The second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after adding SN11.
例如,当第一请求消息是辅节点增加请求消息时,辅节点增加请求消息可以指示增加SN11后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,SN11可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。For example, when the first request message is a secondary node addition request message, the secondary node addition request message may indicate that the PDCP entity of the first bearer after adding SN11 is on SN11, and SN11 may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
例如,当第一请求消息是辅节点修改请求消息时,辅节点修改请求消息可以指示修改承载类型后第一承载的PDCP实体在SN11上,SN11可以生成第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。For example, when the first request message is a secondary node modification request message, the secondary node modification request message may indicate that the PDCP entity of the first bearer is on SN11 after modifying the bearer type, and SN11 may generate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度与第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度可以不同。The length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer may be different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer.
例如,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以是18bit。For example, the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer may be 18 bits.
可选的,第二PDCP SN长度可以包括第一承载的第二上行PDCP SN长度和第一承载的第二下行PDCP SN长度中的一种或者两种,例如第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第二上行PDCP SN长度;或者,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第二下行PDCP SN长度;或者,第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以为第一承载的第二上行PDCP SN长度和第一承载的第二下行PDCP SN长度。第一承载的第二上行PDCP SN长度为修改承载前第一承载的上行PDCP SN长度;第一承载的第二下行PDCP SN长度为修改承载类型前第一承载的下行PDCP SN长度。Optionally, the second PDCP SN length may include one or two of the second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer, such as the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. It may be the second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or, the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer; or the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be The length of the second uplink PDCP SN of the first bearer and the length of the second downlink PDCP SN of the first bearer. The second uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the uplink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before the bearer is modified; the second downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the downlink PDCP SN length of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,第二PDCP SN长度与第一PDCP SN长度不同,可以理解为第二上行PDCP SN长度与第一上行PDCP SN长度不同,或者第二下行PDCP SN长度与第一下行PDCP SN长度不同。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the length of the second PDCP SN is different from the length of the first PDCP SN. It can be understood that the length of the second uplink PDCP SN is different from the length of the first uplink PDCP SN, or the length of the second downlink PDCP The length of the first downlink PDCP SN is different.
S1803:SN11向MN01发送第一请求响应消息。S1803: SN11 sends a first request response message to MN01.
可选的,第一请求相应消息可以是辅节点增加请求响应消息或者辅节点修改请求响应消息。Optionally, the first request corresponding message may be a secondary node addition request response message or a secondary node modification request response message.
例如,当第一请求消息为第一辅节点增加请求消息时,第一请求响应消息为第一辅节点增加请求响应消息;当第一请求消息为第一辅节点修改请求消息时,第一请求响应消息为第一辅节点修改请求响应消息。For example, when the first request message is the first secondary node addition request message, the first request response message is the first secondary node addition request response message; when the first request message is the first secondary node modification request message, the first request The response message is a first secondary node modification request response message.
第一请求响应消息可以包括:The first request response message may include:
(1)MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID(1) The ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 on the interface
可以参考S1801中的MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID中的相关内 容。You can refer to the related content in the ID of the terminal 21 assigned to the terminal 21 by MN01 in S1801.
(2)SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID(2) The ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the SN11 to the terminal 21 on the interface
其中,该接口为MN01与SN11之间的接口。The interface is an interface between MN01 and SN11.
其中,SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID用于在SN11与MN01之间的接口上标识终端21。The ID on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 is used to identify the terminal 21 on the interface between the SN11 and the MN01.
例如,在EN-DC场景下,MN01与SN11之间的接口为X2接口,SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID为X2AP ID。For example, in the EN-DC scenario, the interface between MN01 and SN11 is the X2 interface, and the ID on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 is X2AP ID.
再例如,在NGEN-DC、NR-DC和NE-DC场景下,MN01和SN11之间的接口为Xn接口,SN11为终端21分配的在接口上的ID为XnAP ID。For another example, in the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, the interface between MN01 and SN11 is an Xn interface, and the ID on the interface assigned by SN11 to terminal 21 is XnAPID.
(3)第一承载的E-RAB标识(3) E-RAB identification of the first bearer
可以与S1801中第一请求消息中携带的第一承载的E-RAB标识相同,可以参考S1801中的E-RAB标识的相关内容。It may be the same as the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request message in S1801, and may refer to the related content of the E-RAB identifier in S1801.
(4)第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度(4) Second PDCP SN length of the first bearer
可选的,SN11在确定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,且第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度与第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度不同时,SN11可以不生成第一承载的第一承载标识对应的SN11上的实体的配置信息,第一响应消息中可以不带第一承载的第一承载标识对应的SN11上的实体的配置信息,而等到接收到MN01发送的第一承载的第二承载标识后,再下发第一承载在SN11上的实体的配置信息,可以节约通信资源。Optionally, when SN11 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer, SN11 may not generate the first The configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the bearer identifier, the first response message may not include the configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, and wait until the first After the second bearer identifier, the configuration information of the first bearer on the SN11 is delivered, which can save communication resources.
S1804:MN01向SN11发送第二请求消息。S1804: MN01 sends a second request message to SN11.
可选的,第二请求消息可以是第二辅节点增加请求消息或者第二辅节点修改请求消息。Optionally, the second request message may be a second secondary node addition request message or a second secondary node modification request message.
例如,当第一请求消息为第一辅节点增加请求消息时,第二请求消息可以为第二辅节点增加请求消息或者第二辅节点修改请求消息。For example, when the first request message is a request message for a first secondary node addition, the second request message may be a request message for a second secondary node or a second secondary node modification request message.
例如,当第一请求消息为第一辅节点修改请求消息时,第二请求消息可以为第二辅节点修改请求消息。For example, when the first request message is the first secondary node modification request message, the second request message may be the second secondary node modification request message.
S1803中MN01接收到SN11发送的第一请求响应消息后,可以获取第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,MN01可以比较第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度与第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度,当不同时,说明SN11更改了第一承载的PDCP SN长度,MN01可以为第一承载提供第二承载标识,并发送给SN11,用于SN11执行承载的先释放再增加处理,其中第一承载的第二承载标识与第一承载的第一承载标识不同。In S1803, after receiving the first request response message sent by SN11, MN01 can obtain the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer, and MN01 can compare the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer with the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer. When different, it indicates that SN11 changed the PDCP SN length of the first bearer. MN01 can provide the second bearer identifier for the first bearer and send it to SN11 for SN11 to perform the release and increase of the bearer first. The second bearer identifier is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
第二请求消息可以包括:The second request message may include:
(1)MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID(1) The ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 to the terminal 21 on the interface
可以参考S1801中的MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID中的相关内容。For details, refer to the ID on the interface of the terminal 21 allocated by the MN01 to the terminal 21 in S1801.
(2)第一承载的E-RAB标识(2) E-RAB identification of the first bearer
可以与S1801中第一请求消息中携带的第一承载的E-RAB标识,和S1803中第一请求响应消息中携带的第一承载的E-RAB标识相同。It may be the same as the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request message in S1801, and the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first request response message in S1803.
(3)第一承载的第二承载标识(3) The second bearer identifier of the first bearer
第一承载的第一承载标识和第一承载的第二承载标识对应于同一个E-RAB标识。The first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer correspond to the same E-RAB identifier.
可选的,针对第二请求消息为第二辅节点修改请求消息的这种情况,此时需要在第二辅节点修改请求消息中的承载修改列表中,指示第一承载的E-RAB ID的同时,指示第一承载的第二承载标识。Optionally, for the case where the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, at this time, it is necessary to indicate the E-RAB ID of the first bearer in the bearer modification list in the second secondary node modification request message. At the same time, a second bearer identifier of the first bearer is indicated.
例如,可以通过3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.4.5中“SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST”中的“待修改的E-RAB项目”(“E-RABs To Be Modified Item”)中增加信元“DRB ID”,具体信元结构可以如下表1所示:For example, the cell "DRB ID" can be added to the "E-RAB item to be modified" ("E-RABs To Be Modified Item") in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST" section of 9.1.4.5 in 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0. ", The specific cell structure can be shown in Table 1 below:
Figure PCTCN2019092442-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019092442-appb-000001
表1Table 1
可选的,第二请求消息还可以包括第一指示信息。Optionally, the second request message may further include first indication information.
作为第一种可选的实施方式,该第一指示信息用于指示第一承载的承载标识发生变化。As a first optional implementation manner, the first indication information is used to indicate that a bearer identifier of the first bearer is changed.
作为第二种可选的实施方式,第一指示信息可以指示第二请求消息与第一请求消息相关,这里第二请求消息与第一请求消息相关可以理解为第二请求消息更改了第一请求消息中的承载标识,或者第二请求消息是第一请求消息的延续。As a second optional implementation manner, the first indication information may indicate that the second request message is related to the first request message, and where the second request message is related to the first request message, it can be understood that the second request message changes the first request. The bearer identifier in the message, or the second request message is a continuation of the first request message.
作为第三种可选的实施方式,第一指示信息可以指示第二请求消息与第一请求响应消息相关,这里第二请求消息与第一请求响应消息相关可以理解为第二请求消息是基于第一请求响应消息产生的,或者第二请求消息是对第一请求响应消息的回应。As a third optional implementation manner, the first indication information may indicate that the second request message is related to the first request response message. Here, the second request message is related to the first request response message. It can be understood that the second request message is based on the first request message. A request response message is generated, or the second request message is a response to the first request response message.
作为第四种可选的实施方式,第一指示信息可以指示SN11基于第一承载的第二承载标识去生成配置信息。例如,当第二请求消息为第二辅节点修改请求消息时,此时需要SN11生成一套完整的配置第一指示信息可以用于指示SN11生成全配置,而不是在S1803中生成的配置基础上做差异(delta)配置。As a fourth optional implementation manner, the first indication information may instruct the SN11 to generate configuration information based on the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. For example, when the second request message is a second secondary node modification request message, the SN11 is required to generate a complete set of configurations. The first indication information can be used to instruct the SN11 to generate a full configuration, instead of based on the configuration generated in S1803. Make a delta configuration.
需要说明的是,上述第一指示信息可以通过现有信元携带,该现有信元可以用于MN01向SN11请求SN11上的最新配置。本申请实施例中,可以扩展该信元的含义,当SN11接收到第一承载的第二承载标识和第一指示信息后,可以为终端21生成完整的配置。例如该现有信元可以是3GPP TS36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.2.103中的信元“SCG配置查询”(“SCG Configuration Query”)。It should be noted that the first indication information may be carried by an existing cell, and the existing cell may be used by the MN01 to request the latest configuration on the SN11 from the SN11. In the embodiment of the present application, the meaning of the cell may be extended. After receiving the second bearer identifier and the first indication information of the first bearer, the SN11 may generate a complete configuration for the terminal 21. For example, the existing cell may be the cell "SCG Configuration Query" in 39.2 TS36.423 V15.1.0 section 9.2.103.
或者,可以定义新的信元,上述第一指示信息可以通过新的信元携带,该新的信元用于指示SN11为终端21生成完整的配置。Alternatively, a new cell may be defined, and the first indication information may be carried by a new cell, and the new cell is used to instruct the SN 11 to generate a complete configuration for the terminal 21.
上述都为示例性举例说明,不造成任何限定。The above are all exemplary illustrations without any limitation.
在上述多种可选的实施方式中,第一指示信息具体可以包括SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID和第一承载的第一承载标识中的一种或者两种,也可以是其他,本申请实施例不做限定。In the foregoing multiple optional implementation manners, the first indication information may specifically include one or two of the ID of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 to the terminal 21 and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, or may be Others are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选的,MN01和SN11可以协商当第二请求消息包括SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID,和第一承载的第一承载标识中的一种或者两种时,第一指示信 息可以指示上述多种可选的实施方式的内容。Optionally, MN01 and SN11 may negotiate the first indication when the second request message includes one or two of the ID of the terminal 21 allocated by the SN11 for the terminal 21 and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. The information may indicate the contents of the various optional embodiments described above.
当第二请求消息为第二辅节点增加请求消息时,通过在第二辅节点增加请求消息中携带第一指示信息,可以避免SN11在接收到第二辅节点增加请求消息后,由于第二辅节点增加请求消息和第一辅节点增加请求消息携带的第一承载的E-RAB标识相同,SN11将第二辅节点增加请求消息当作异常消息,而不进行处理。When the second request message is the second secondary node addition request message, by carrying the first instruction information in the second secondary node addition request message, it is possible to avoid SN11 after receiving the second secondary node addition request message due to the second secondary node The node addition request message is the same as the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer carried in the first secondary node addition request message, and SN11 treats the second secondary node addition request message as an abnormal message without processing.
当第二请求消息为第二辅节点修改请求消息时,通过在第二辅节点修改请求消息中携带第一指示信息,可以避免SN11在接收到第二辅节点修改请求消息后,认为第二辅节点修改请求消息是用于修改第一承载的标识的,从而仅仅修改第一承载的承载标识,例如从第一承载标识修改为第二承载标识。When the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, by carrying the first indication information in the second secondary node modification request message, it can be avoided that SN11 considers the second secondary node to receive the second secondary node modification request message after receiving the second secondary node modification request message. The node modification request message is used to modify the identity of the first bearer, so as to modify only the bearer identity of the first bearer, for example, from the first bearer identity to the second bearer identity.
可选的,第二请求消息可以不包括第一指示信息,例如S1803中第一请求响应消息不包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的SN11上的实体的配置信息,说明SN11已经判断出发生了PDCP SN长度变更,而没有在S1803中生成配置,此时,SN11知道在此时需要生成一套完整的配置,则可以不需要额外的指示。Optionally, the second request message may not include the first indication information, for example, the first request response message in S1803 does not include the configuration information of the entity on the SN11 corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, indicating that SN11 has determined that the occurrence In order to change the PDCP SN length without generating a configuration in S1803, at this time, SN11 knows that a complete set of configuration needs to be generated at this time, and no additional instructions are required.
下面结合S1805-S1807,介绍MN01和SN11为终端21生成第一承载标识对应的实体的释放的配置信息,和第二承载标识对应的实体的增加的配置信息。The following describes, with reference to S1805-S1807, MN01 and SN11 for the terminal 21 to generate the release configuration information of the entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S1805:SN11生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。S1805: SN11 generates secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
SN11在接收到第一承载的第二承载标识后,可以生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。After receiving the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, the SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer includes configuration information released by the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and configuration information added by the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the SN. The configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the first bearer identifier Release of the corresponding PDCP entity and configuration information added by the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息还可以包括第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还包括第二承载标识对应的逻辑实体增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may further include added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and optionally, it may further include configuration information of the logical entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,以及第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的MAC实体增加的配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer or the SN terminated split bearer. The configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer is It may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier. Added configuration information for the MAC entity.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息还可以包括第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放和第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the secondary bearer of the first bearer may further include the configuration information of the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Configuration information of release of a logical channel corresponding to one bearer identifier and addition of a logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的split承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载或者SN终结的split承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体、RLC实体的释放配置和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体、RLC实体的增加配置,可选的,还可能包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放配置和第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加配置。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an MN terminated split bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is an SN terminated SCG bearer or an SN terminated split bearer. It may include the release configuration of the PDCP entity and RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the addition configuration of the PDCP entity and RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, it may also include the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier Increased configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S1806:SN11向MN01发送第二请求响应消息。S1806: SN11 sends a second request response message to MN01.
第二请求响应消息可以包括第一承载的辅节点配置信息。The second request response message may include secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第二请求响应消息可以是第二辅节点增加请求响应消息或者第二辅节点修改请求响应消息。Optionally, the second request response message may be a second secondary node addition request response message or a second secondary node modification request response message.
例如,当第二请求消息为第二辅节点增加请求消息时,第二请求响应消息为第二辅节点增加请求响应消息;当第二请求消息为第二辅节点修改请求消息时,第二请求响应消息为第二辅节点修改请求响应消息。For example, when the second request message adds a request message to the second secondary node, the second request response message adds a request response message to the second secondary node; when the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, the second request The response message is a modification request response message for the second secondary node.
S1807:MN01生成第一承载的主节点配置信息。S1807: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。可选的,还可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放配置和第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the increase configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier may also be included.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载或者MN终结的SPLIT承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。可选的,还可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放配置和第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the first bearer type is an MN terminated MCG bearer or the MN terminated SPLIT bearer. After the bearer type is modified, the first bearer type is an SN terminated MCG bearer or an SN terminated SPLIT bearer. The master node configuration information of the bearer may include configuration information of release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, the release configuration of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the increase configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier may also be included.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息。可选的,还可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. Optionally, the release configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier may also be included.
例如,修改承载类型前第一承载的承载类型为MN终结的MCG承载或者MN终结的SPLIT承载,修改承载类型后第一承载的承载类型为SN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放配置信息。For example, before the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the MCG bearer terminated by the MN or the SPLIT bearer of the MN terminates. After the bearer type is modified, the bearer type of the first bearer is the SN terminated SCG bearer. The master node configuration information of the first bearer It may include release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and release configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
S1808:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S1808: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息中可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识,第一承载的主节点配置信息和第一承载的辅节点配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, the primary node configuration information of the first bearer, and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的主节点配置信息和第一承载的辅节点配置信息执行所述第一承载的先删除后增加操作。Optionally, according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的第一承载的删除,和第二承载标识对应的第一承载的增加操作。Optionally, the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的实体的删除和第二承载标识对应的实体的增加操作。Optionally, according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S1809:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S1809: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
S1810:MN01向SN11发送SN重配置完成消息。S1810: MN01 sends an SN reconfiguration completion message to SN11.
S1811:终端21与SN11完成随机接入。S1811: The terminal 21 and the SN11 complete random access.
图18以EN-DC场景为例,但是图18的方法同样适用于NGEN-DC、NR-DC和NE-DC场景,即核心网网元31为5GC,下面描述核心网网元31为5GC时图18中的改动。Figure 18 uses the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 18 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 18.
可选的,在图18需要携带E-RAB ID的消息中,E-RAB标识可以不携带或者用第一承载的第一承载标识替代。Optionally, in the message that needs to carry the E-RAB ID in FIG. 18, the E-RAB identifier may not be carried or may be replaced with the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
在S1801中,第一请求消息可以是第一辅节点增加请求消息或者第一辅节点修改请求消息,第一请求消息可以不携带E-RAB标识,可以携带S1801中的第一承载的第一承载标识。In S1801, the first request message may be a first secondary node addition request message or a first secondary node modification request message. The first request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and may carry the first bearer of the first bearer in S1801. Logo.
在S1803中,第一请求响应消息可以是第一辅节点增加请求响应消息或者第一辅节点修改请求响应消息,可以用第一承载的第一承载标识替代E-RAB标识,例如,第一请求响应消息可以不携带E-RAB标识,携带第一承载的第一承载标识。In S1803, the first request response message may be a first secondary node addition request response message or a first secondary node modification request response message, and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer may be used instead of the E-RAB identifier. For example, the first request The response message may not carry the E-RAB identifier and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
在S1804中,当第二请求消息为第二辅节点增加请求消息时,第二请求消息可以不携带E-RAB标识,携带第一承载的第一承载标识和S1804中的第一承载的第二承载标识;当第二请求消息为第二辅节点修改请求消息时,第二辅节点修改请求消息可以不携带E-RAB标识,携带第一承载的第一承载标识和S1804中的第一承载的第二承载标识,例如,可以参考表1,第一承载的第一承载标识和第一承载的第二承载标识可以通过表1的信元“DRB ID”携带。In S1804, when the second request message is an additional request message for the second secondary node, the second request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer in S1804. Bearer identifier; when the second request message is the second secondary node modification request message, the second secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier in S1804. For example, the second bearer identifier may refer to Table 1. The first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may be carried by the cell "DRB ID" of Table 1.
例如,以图18中的第一请求消息为第一辅站增加请求消息,第二请求消息为第二辅站修改请求消息为例,在第二请求消息中携带第一承载标识和对应的第二承载标识信息,用于指示SN11更改承载标识,即用第二承载标识替换第一承载标识。For example, taking the first request message in FIG. 18 as the first secondary station addition request message and the second request message as the second secondary station modification request message as an example, the second request message carries the first bearer identifier and the corresponding first The second bearer identification information is used to instruct the SN11 to change the bearer identification, that is, to replace the first bearer identification with the second bearer identification.
通过上述方案,可以在核心网网31为5GC的情况下,通过用第一承载的第一承载标识替代E-RAB标识,可以使得MN01和SN11可以获知第二承载标识对应于第一承载标识的承载,即第一承载的承载标识发生了变化。With the above solution, when the core network 31 is 5GC, by replacing the E-RAB identifier with the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, MN01 and SN11 can learn that the second bearer identifier corresponds to the first bearer identifier. The bearer, that is, the bearer identifier of the first bearer has changed.
在图18中的方法中,本申请还提供了一种可替代的实施方式,可以在S1803中携带第一承载的第二承载标识,而不需要携带第一承载的第一承载标识,SN11在收到第二请求消息后,确定第二请求消息中包括第一承载的承载标识,例如第一承载的第二承载标识,SN11在接收到第二请求消息后,可以使用新的承载标识生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息,例如使用第一承载的第二承载标识生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。In the method in FIG. 18, the present application also provides an alternative implementation manner. The second bearer identifier of the first bearer can be carried in S1803, without the need to carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. After receiving the second request message, it is determined that the second request message includes the bearer identifier of the first bearer, for example, the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. After receiving the second request message, SN11 may use the new bearer identifier to generate the first bearer identifier. The configuration information of the secondary node of a bearer, for example, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer is used to generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
图19为该变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图。以EN-DC为例,在该实施方式中,第一承载在修改承载类型前后都终结于MN01;另外,第一承载在修改承载类型前后,第一承载都是建立在MN01和SN11上的。FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the variable PDCP SN length. Taking EN-DC as an example, in this embodiment, the first bearer ends at MN01 before and after the bearer type is modified; in addition, the first bearer is established at MN01 and SN11 before and after the bearer type is modified.
S1901:MN01确定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S1901: MN01 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载在修改承载类型前后都终结于MN01,MN01可以决定承载类型修改后的第一承载的PDCP SN长度,这里将承载类型修改后的第一承载的PDCP SN长度称为第二PDCP SN长度,承载类型修改前的第一承载的PDCP SN长度称为第一PDCP SN长度。The first bearer ends at MN01 before and after the bearer type is modified. MN01 can determine the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified. Here, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer after the bearer type is modified is called the second PDCP SN length The length of the PDCP SN of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is called the first PDCP SN length.
可选的,这里第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度可以是上行PDCP SN长度和/或下行PDCP SN长度,具体可以参考S1802中第二PDCP SN长度的相关内容。Optionally, the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer may be an uplink PDCP SN length and / or a downlink PDCP SN length. For details, refer to the related content of the second PDCP SN length in S1802.
S1902:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息。S1902: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
当第二PDCP SN长度不同于第一PDCP SN长度时,MN01可以为第一承载重新生成一个承载标识,这里将承载类型修改后的第一承载的承载标识称为第一承载的第二承载标识,将承载类型修改前的第一承载的承载标识称为第一承载的第一承载标识。When the length of the second PDCP SN is different from the length of the first PDCP SN, MN01 can regenerate a bearer identifier for the first bearer. Here, the bearer identifier of the first bearer with the modified bearer type is referred to as the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. The bearer identifier of the first bearer before the bearer type is modified is referred to as the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
辅节点修改请求消息可以包括MN01为终端21分配的接口上的ID,第一承载的E-RAB ID和第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。The secondary node modification request message may include the ID on the interface allocated by the MN01 to the terminal 21, the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
辅节点修改请求消息还可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识。The secondary node modification request message may further include a second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,可以在辅节点修改请求消息中的承载修改列表中,指示第一承载的E-RAB ID的同时,指示第一承载的第二承载标识。Optionally, the bearer modification list in the secondary node modification request message may indicate the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
例如,可以通过3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.4.5中“SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST”中的“E-RABs To Be Modified Item”中增加信元“DRB ID”,具体信元结构可以如上面表1所示。For example, the cell "DRB ID" can be added to the "E-RABs To Be Modified Item" in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST" section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0. The specific cell structure can be as shown in Table 1 above. As shown.
由于MN01修改承载的配置时,辅节点修改请求消息中的承载修改列表中不会携带承载的标识,通过辅节点修改请求消息中携带第一承载的第二承载标识,可以使得SN11获知MN01修改了承载的PDCP SN长度,需要重新生成承载的辅节点配置信息。When the MN01 modifies the configuration of the bearer, the bearer modification list in the secondary node modification request message does not carry the identifier of the bearer. The secondary node modification request message carries the second bearer identifier of the first bearer, so that SN11 can learn that MN01 has been modified. The length of the PDCP and SN of the bearer needs to regenerate the configuration information of the bearer secondary node.
下面对MN01和SN11如何生成第一承载的配置信息进行说明。MN01和SN11为终端21生成第一承载标识对应的实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的实体的增加的配置信息。The following describes how MN01 and SN11 generate configuration information of the first bearer. MN01 and SN11 generate, for the terminal 21, configuration information of release of an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S1903:SN11生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。S1903: SN11 generates secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
当SN11在S1903中接收到第一承载的第二承载标识后,可以通过第一承载的E-RAB标识获取第一承载的第一承载标识,例如SN11保存了E-RAB标识和对应的第一承载的第一承载标识;然后SN11可以比较第一承载的第一承载标识和第一承载的第二承载标识,当第一承载的第一承载标识和第二承载标识不同时,说明MN01重新为该承载分配了承载标识,SN11可以生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。After SN11 receives the second bearer identifier of the first bearer in S1903, it can obtain the first bearer identifier of the first bearer through the E-RAB identifier of the first bearer. For example, SN11 stores the E-RAB identifier and the corresponding first bearer identifier. The first bearer identifier of the bearer; then SN11 can compare the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. When the first bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer are different, it means that MN01 is again The bearer is assigned a bearer identifier, and the SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer may include configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier and increased configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
例如,第一承载在承载类型修改前为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在承载类型修改后为MN终结的SPLIT承载,或者,第一承载在承载类型修改前MN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载在承载类型修改后为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的RLC实体和逻辑信道的释放的配置信息,和第二承载标识对应的RLC实体和逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified, the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified, or the first bearer is the SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified. The bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified. The configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the configuration information of the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the logical channel, and the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Added configuration information for logical channels.
S1904:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改请求响应消息。S1904: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
辅节点修改请求响应消息包括第一承载的辅节点配置信息。The secondary node modification request response message includes the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
S1905:MN01生成第一承载的主节点配置信息。S1905: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息还可以包括第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。可选的,还可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may further include the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier. Optionally, it may further include added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息还可以包括第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息,可选的,还可以包括第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信 息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may further include release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier, and optionally, may also include configuration information of release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
例如,第一承载在承载类型修改前为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载在承载类型修改后为MN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,以及第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified, and the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified. The master node configuration information of the first bearer may include a PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier. The released configuration information and the increased configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and the increased configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
例如,第一承载在承载类型修改前为MN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载在承载类型修改后为MN终结的SCG承载,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息,以及第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SPLIT bearer terminated by the MN before the bearer type is modified, and the first bearer is an SCG bearer terminated by the MN after the bearer type is modified. The master node configuration information of the first bearer may include a PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier. The released configuration information and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier, and the released configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier.
S1906:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S1906: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
RRC连接重配置消息可以包括第一承载的第二承载标识、第一承载的辅节点配置信息和第一承载的主节点配置信息。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a second bearer identifier of the first bearer, secondary node configuration information of the first bearer, and master node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的主节点配置信息和第一承载的辅节点配置信息执行所述第一承载的先删除后增加操作。Optionally, according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的第一承载的删除,和第二承载标识对应的第一承载的增加操作。Optionally, the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的实体的删除和第二承载标识对应的实体的增加操作。Optionally, according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S1907:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S1907: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
S1908:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改确认(SN modification confirm)消息。S1908: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation (SN) confirmation message to SN11.
图19以EN-DC场景为例,但是图19的方法同样适用于NGEN-DC、NR-DC和NE-DC场景,即核心网网元31为5GC,下面描述核心网网元31为5GC时图19中的改动。Figure 19 takes the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 19 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 19.
可选的,在图19需要携带E-RAB ID的消息中,E-RAB标识可以用第一承载的第一承载标识替代。Optionally, in the message that needs to carry the E-RAB ID in FIG. 19, the E-RAB identifier may be replaced with the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
在S1902中,辅节点修改请求消息可以不携带E-RAB标识,可以携带第一承载的第一承载标识。在S1903中,SN11可以判断第一承载的第一承载标识和第一承载的第二承载标识,当第一承载的第一承载标识和第二承载标识不同时,说明MN01重新为该承载分配了承载标识,SN11可以生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。In S1902, the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB identifier, and may carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. In S1903, SN11 can judge the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. When the first bearer identifier and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer are different, it means that MN01 has reassigned the bearer. Bearer ID. SN11 can generate the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
图20为改变PDCP SN长度的一种实施方式的示意图,其中以EN-DC场景为例。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation manner of changing the length of a PDCP SN, where an EN-DC scenario is taken as an example.
S2001:SN11确定第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度。S2001: SN11 determines the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
第一承载终结于SN11,SN11可以决定变更第一承载的PDCP SN长度,例如,将第一承载的PDCP长度从第一PDCP SN长度变更为第二PDCP SN长度。The first bearer ends at SN11. SN11 may decide to change the PDCP SN length of the first bearer, for example, change the PDCP length of the first bearer from the first PDCP SN length to the second PDCP SN length.
可选的,这里第一PDCP SN长度可以是第一上行PDCP SN长度和/或第一下行PDCP SN长度,第二PDCP SN长度可以是第二上行PDCP SN长度和/或第二下行PDCP SN长度。可以参考图18和图19中的相关内容。Optionally, the first PDCP SN length may be the first uplink PDCP SN length and / or the first downlink PDCP SN length, and the second PDCP SN length may be the second uplink PDCP SN length and / or the second downlink PDCP SN length. Please refer to the related content in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19.
S2002:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改申请消息。S2002: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request message to MN01.
辅节点修改申请消息包括MN01为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID、SN11为终端21分配的终端21在接口上的ID,第一承载的E-RAB ID和第一承载的第二 PDCP SN长度。The secondary node modification request message includes the ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the MN01 for the terminal 21, the ID of the terminal 21 assigned by the SN11 for the terminal 21, the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and the second PDCP of the first bearer SN length.
MN01在接收到辅节点修改申请消息后,可以通过第一承载的E-RAB ID获取第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度,当第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度不同于第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度时,MN01可以确定第一承载的第二承载标识,第一承载的第二承载标识不同于第一承载的第一承载标识,第一承载的第一承载标识为MN01接收到辅节点修改申请消息前第一承载的承载标识,例如MN01可以保存第一承载的E-RAB ID和第一承载的第一承载标识。After receiving the modification request message of the secondary node, MN01 can obtain the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer through the E-RAB ID of the first bearer. When the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer is different from the second bearer of the first bearer, When the length of the PDCP is SN, MN01 can determine the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. The second bearer identifier of the first bearer is different from the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. The first bearer identifier of the first bearer is that MN01 receives the secondary node. Before modifying the application message, the bearer identifier of the first bearer, for example, MN01 can save the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
S2003:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改请求消息。S2003: MN01 sends a secondary node modification request message to SN11.
辅节点修改请求消息可以包括E-RAB标识、第一承载的第二承载标识。The secondary node modification request message may include an E-RAB identifier and a second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,可以在第二辅节点修改请求消息中的承载修改列表中,指示第一承载的E-RAB ID的同时,指示第一承载的第二承载标识。Optionally, the bearer modification list in the second secondary node modification request message may indicate the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
例如,可以通过3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0的章节9.1.4.5中“SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST”中的“E-RABs To Be Modified Item”中增加信元“DRB ID”,具体信元结构可以如上述表1所示。For example, the cell "DRB ID" can be added to the "E-RABs To Be Modified Item" in the "SGNB Modifications REQUEST" section of Section 9.1.4.5 of 3GPP TS 36.423 V15.1.0. The specific cell structure can be as shown in Table 1 above. As shown.
S2004:SN11生成第一承载的辅节点配置信息。S2004: SN11 generates secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include release information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信息和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include release information of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. The configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may also be included.
例如,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变更前后均为SN终结的MCG承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer before and after the PDCP SN length changes. The configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the release of the PDCP entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the second bearer of the first bearer. Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
例如,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变更前后均为SN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载的辅节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放和RLC实体的释放的配置信息和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的PDCP实体和RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信息和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息For example, the first bearer is a SPLIT bearer terminated by SN before and after the SN length changes. The configuration information of the secondary node of the first bearer may include the release configuration of the PDCP entity and the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer. The information and the added configuration information of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may optionally include configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the first Added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the bearer
S2005:SN11向MN01发送辅节点修改请求响应消息。S2005: SN11 sends a secondary node modification request response message to MN01.
辅节点修改请求响应消息可以包括第一承载的辅节点配置信息。The secondary node modification request response message may include secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
S2006:MN01生成第一承载的主节点配置信息。S2006: MN01 generates master node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还可以包括第一承载的第一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信息和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。Optionally, the configuration information of the master node of the first bearer may include the release of the RLC entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. The configuration information of the release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and the added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer may also be included.
例如,第一承载在PDCP SN长度变更前后均为SN终结的MCG承载或者SN终结的SPLIT承载,第一承载的主节点配置信息可以包括RLC实体的释放和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息,可选的,还可以包括第一承载的第 一承载标识对应的逻辑信道的释放的配置信息和第一承载的第二承载标识对应的逻辑信道的增加的配置信息。For example, the first bearer is an SN-terminated MCG bearer or an SN-terminated SPLIT bearer before and after the PDCP SN length changes. The master node configuration information of the first bearer may include the release of the RLC entity and the corresponding second bearer identifier of the first bearer The added configuration information of the RLC entity may optionally include configuration information of release of the logical channel corresponding to the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and added configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the second bearer identifier of the first bearer. .
S2007:MN01向终端21发送RRC连接重配置消息。S2007: MN01 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to terminal 21.
可选的,终端21根据RRC连接重配置消息中的包括的承载标识,第一承载的主节点配置信息和第一承载的辅节点配置信息执行所述第一承载的先删除后增加操作。Optionally, according to the bearer identifier included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 performs the first delete and then add operation of the first bearer according to the primary node configuration information of the first bearer and the secondary node configuration information of the first bearer.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的第一承载的删除,和第二承载标识对应的第一承载的增加操作。Optionally, the terminal 21 may perform deletion of the first bearer corresponding to the first bearer identifier and addition of the first bearer corresponding to the second bearer identifier according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
可选的,终端21可以根据RRC连接重配置消息,执行第一承载标识对应的实体的删除和第二承载标识对应的实体的增加操作。Optionally, according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the terminal 21 may perform an operation of deleting an entity corresponding to the first bearer identifier and adding an entity corresponding to the second bearer identifier.
S2008:终端21向MN01发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。S2008: The terminal 21 sends an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the MN01.
S2009:MN01向SN11发送辅节点修改确认消息。S2009: MN01 sends a secondary node modification confirmation message to SN11.
图20以EN-DC场景为例,但是图20的方法同样适用于NGEN-DC、NR-DC和NE-DC场景,即核心网网元31为5GC,下面描述核心网网元31为5GC时图20中的改动。Figure 20 uses the EN-DC scenario as an example, but the method in Figure 20 is also applicable to the NGEN-DC, NR-DC, and NE-DC scenarios, that is, the core network element 31 is 5GC. The following describes when the core network element 31 is 5GC. Changes in Figure 20.
在S2002中,辅节点修改申请消息可以不携带第一承载的E-RAB ID,携带第一承载的第一承载标识。In S2002, the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB ID of the first bearer, and carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer.
在S2003中,辅节点修改请求消息可以不携带第一承载的E-RAB ID,携带第一承载的第一承载标识,也就是说辅节点修改请求消息可以携带第一承载的第一承载标识和第一承载的第二承载标识。In S2003, the secondary node modification request message may not carry the E-RAB ID of the first bearer and the first bearer identifier of the first bearer, that is, the secondary node modification request message may carry the first bearer identifier of the first bearer and The second bearer identifier of the first bearer.
M1方法、M2方法、图18-至图20介绍了几种变更PDCP SN长度的方法流程图,要理解的是,MN01可以存在与MN01方法或者流程的步骤对应的功能单元,SN11可以存在与SN11方法或者流程的步骤对应的功能单元。The M1 method, M2 method, and Figures 18 to 20 introduce the flowcharts of several methods for changing the length of PDCP and SN. It should be understood that MN01 may have functional units corresponding to the MN01 method or process steps, and SN11 may exist with SN11. Functional units corresponding to steps of a method or process.
M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20的方法中由MN01执行的动作,可以由图6a、图15或者图17提供的通信装置实现;M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20的方法中由SN11执行的动作,可以由图6b、图16或者图17提供的SN11的结构实现。具体可以参考图6a、图6、图15-图17中的相关内容。The actions performed by MN01 in the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be implemented by the communication device provided in FIG. 6a, FIG. 15 or FIG. 17; The actions performed by the SN11 may be implemented by the structure of the SN11 provided in FIG. 6b, FIG. 16 or FIG. For details, please refer to the related content in FIG. 6a, FIG. 6, and FIG. 15-17.
M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20的方法可以通过计算机可读存储介质和计算机程序产品实现,具体可以参考本申请实施例关于计算机可读存储介质和计算机程序产品的相关内容。The M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be implemented by using a computer-readable storage medium and a computer program product. For details, refer to the related content of the embodiments of the present application regarding the computer-readable storage medium and the computer program product.
本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得通信装置M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20中由MN01执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device including a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device M1 method, M2 method, FIG. 18 -The method performed by MN01 in FIG. 20.
本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得通信装置M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20中由SN11执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device including a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device M1 method, M2 method, FIG. 18 -The method performed by SN11 in FIG. 20.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,存储有上述M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20中MN01或者SN11的方法的程序。An embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium that stores a program of the M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods of MN01 or SN11 in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,该程序产品包括程序,当该程序被运行时,使得有上述M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20中MN01或者SN11的方法被执行。The embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product. The program product includes a program. When the program is executed, the M1 method, the M2 method, and the MN01 or SN11 method in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 are executed.
M1方法、M2方法、图18-图20的方法可以与本申请实施例其余部分的内容相互参考和引用。The M1 method, the M2 method, and the methods in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 may be cross-referenced and cited with the content of the rest of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (96)

  1. 一种双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in dual connectivity, characterized in that the method includes:
    主节点从辅节点接收第一PDCP SN长度信息,所述第一PDCP SN长度信息用于指示第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度;The master node receives first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node, and the first PDCP SN length information is used to indicate the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer;
    所述主节点获取所述第一PDCP SN长度。Obtaining, by the master node, the first PDCP SN length.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述主节点获取所述第一PDCP SN长度包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the obtaining, by the master node, the first PDCP SN length comprises:
    所述主节点读取所述第一PDCP SN长度信息中的所述第一PDCP SN长度。The master node reads the first PDCP SN length in the first PDCP SN length information.
  3. 根据权利要求1或者2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising:
    所述主节点从所述辅节点接收所述第一承载的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息;Receiving, by the master node, first configuration information of the first bearer from the secondary node, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity of the first bearer;
    所述主节点向终端发送所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息。Sending, by the master node, the first configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 3, wherein the first configuration information further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 4, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity includes configuration information of release of an RLC entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and RLC corresponding to the bearer identifier Added configuration information for the entity.
  6. 根据权利要求3-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 3-5, wherein the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity includes configuration information of release of a PDCP entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and the configuration information of the PDCP entity. Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, further comprising:
    在接收所述第一PDCP SN长度信息之前,所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度;Before receiving the first PDCP SN length information, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length;
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述主节点生成所述第一承载的第二配置信息;When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the master node generates second configuration information of the first bearer;
    所述主节点向终端发送所述第二配置信息,所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息包括所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The master node sends the second configuration information to a terminal, and the second configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity of the first bearer.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 7, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity of the first bearer includes the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the bearer Identifies the added configuration information of the corresponding RLC entity.
  9. 根据权利要求7或者8所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述主节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the master node, the method Also includes:
    所述主节点生成所述第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信息用于指示所述第二PDCP SN长度;Generating, by the master node, the second PDCP SN length information, where the second PDCP SN length information is used to indicate the second PDCP SN length;
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    所述主节点向所述辅节点发送所述第二PDCP SN长度信息。Sending, by the master node, the second PDCP SN length information to the secondary node.
  10. 根据权利要求7或者8所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述辅节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the secondary node, the method Also includes:
    所述主节点从所述辅节点接收第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度 信息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度。The master node receives second PDCP SN length information from the secondary node, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述主节点从所述辅节点接收第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the primary node receiving first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node comprises:
    所述主节点通过辅节点增加请求响应消息、辅节点修改请求响应消息或者辅节点修改申请消息从所述辅节点接收所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。The primary node receives the first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node through a secondary node addition request response message, a secondary node modification request response message, or a secondary node modification request message.
  12. 一种双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in dual connectivity, characterized in that the method includes:
    辅节点生成第一分组数据汇聚协议PDCP序列号SN长度信息;The secondary node generates the first packet data convergence protocol PDCP sequence number SN length information;
    所述辅节点向主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,所述第一PDCP SN长度信息用于向所述主节点指示第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度。The secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the master node, and the first PDCP SN length information is used to indicate to the master node the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 12, wherein:
    在生成所述第一PDCP SN长度信息之前,所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度,所述方法还包括:Before generating the first PDCP SN length information, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, and the method further includes:
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述辅节点生成所述第一承载的第一配置信息;When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the secondary node generates first configuration information of the first bearer;
    所述辅节点向所述主节点发送所述第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The secondary node sends the first configuration information to the primary node, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 13, wherein the first configuration information further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 14, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity includes configuration information of release of an RLC entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and RLC corresponding to the bearer identifier Added configuration information for the entity.
  16. 根据权利要求13-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 13 to 15, wherein the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity includes configuration information of release of a PDCP entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and the configuration information of the PDCP entity. Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  17. 根据权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于辅节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13-16, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer terminates at a secondary node, and the The method also includes:
    所述辅节点生成第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度;The secondary node generates second PDCP SN length information, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length;
    所述辅节点向主节点发送所述第二PDCP SN长度信息。The secondary node sends the second PDCP SN length information to the primary node.
  18. 根据权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述主节点,所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 16, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the length of the second PDCP SN, the first bearer terminates at the master node, The method includes:
    所述辅节点从所述主节点接收第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度。The secondary node receives second PDCP SN length information from the master node, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length.
  19. 根据权利要求13-18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅节点向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 18, wherein the secondary node sending the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node comprises:
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述辅节点向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node.
  20. 根据权利要求13-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅节点向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the secondary node sending the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node comprises:
    所述辅节点通过辅节点增加请求响应消息、辅节点修改请求响应消息或者辅节点修改申请消息向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。The secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node through a secondary node addition request response message, a secondary node modification request response message, or a secondary node modification request message.
  21. 一种双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in dual connectivity, characterized in that the method includes:
    终端通过主节点从辅节点接收第一承载的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息;The terminal receives first configuration information of the first bearer from the secondary node through the primary node, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer;
    所述终端根据所述第一配置信息配置所述第一承载。The terminal configures the first bearer according to the first configuration information.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 21, wherein the first configuration information further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 22, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity comprises release configuration information of an RLC entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and RLC corresponding to the bearer identifier Added configuration information for the entity.
  24. 根据权利要求21-23任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  25. 根据权利要求21-24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端从所述主节点接收所述第一承载的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息;The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the terminal receives second configuration information of the first bearer from the master node, and the second configuration information includes the first bearer Release and added configuration information of the RLC entity;
    所述终端根据所述第二配置信息配置所述第一承载。The terminal configures the first bearer according to the second configuration information.
  26. 根据权利要求21-25任一项的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity of the first bearer includes configuration information of release of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and Added configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier.
  27. 根据权利要求21-26任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端根据所述第一配置信息配置所述第一承载包括:The method according to any one of claims 21-26, wherein the configuring the first bearer according to the first configuration information comprises:
    所述终端根据所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息,释放所述第一承载的PDCP实体且增加所述第一承载的PDCP实体,其中,释放的PDCP实体的PDCP SN长度和增加的PDCP实体的PDCP SN长度不同。The terminal releases the PDCP entity of the first bearer and increases the PDCP entity of the first bearer according to the release of the PDCP entity of the first bearer and the increased configuration information, wherein the PDCP SN length of the released PDCP entity The PDCP SN length is different from the added PDCP entity.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1至11任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor being used to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory, The communication device is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求12至20任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor being used to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory, The communication device is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 12 to 20.
  30. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求21至27任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor being used to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory, The communication device is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 21 to 27.
  31. 一种装置,所述装置用于执行权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法。A device for performing the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
  32. 一种装置,所述装置用于执行权利要求12-20任一项所述的方法。A device for performing the method according to any one of claims 12-20.
  33. 一种装置,所述装置用于执行权利要求21-27任一项所述的方法。A device for performing the method according to any one of claims 21-27.
  34. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机软件指令,当所述计算机软件指令被执行时实现权利要求1-26任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium is used for storing computer software instructions, and when the computer software instructions are executed, the method according to any one of claims 1-26 is implemented.
  35. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机执行指令,当所述计算机执行指令被执行时实现权利要求1-26任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes computer-executable instructions, and when the computer-executable instructions are executed, the method according to any one of claims 1-26 is implemented.
  36. 一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括权利要求27和30中任一项所述的装置,以及权利要求28和31中任一项所述的装置。A communication system includes the device according to any one of claims 27 and 30, and the device according to any one of claims 28 and 31.
  37. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一DU从第一CU接收PDCP SN长度配置信息,所述PDCP SN长度配置信息用于指示第一承载的PDCP SN长度;The first DU receives PDCP SN length configuration information from the first CU, where the PDCP SN length configuration information is used to indicate a PDCP SN length of the first bearer;
    所述第一DU获取所述PDCP序列号SN长度。Obtaining, by the first DU, the length of the PDCP sequence number SN.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 37, further comprising:
    向所述第一CU发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Sending first configuration information to the first CU, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  39. 根据权利要求37所述的方法,其特征在于,向所述第一CU发送所述第一配置信息包括:The method according to claim 37, wherein sending the first configuration information to the first CU comprises:
    当所述第一DU确定所述PDCP SN长度变更时,向所述第一CU发送所述第一配置信息。When the first DU determines that the PDCP SN length is changed, the first configuration information is sent to the first CU.
  40. 根据权利要求38或者39所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity includes release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the bearer identifier corresponds to Added configuration information for RLC entities.
  41. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一CU确定分组数据汇聚协议PDCP序列号SN长度配置信息,所述PDCP SN长度配置信息用于指示第一承载的PDCP SN长度;The first CU determines the packet data convergence protocol PDCP sequence number SN length configuration information, and the PDCP SN length configuration information is used to indicate a PDCP SN length of the first bearer;
    所述第一CU向第一DU发送所述PDCP SN长度配置信息。Sending, by the first CU, the PDCP SN length configuration information to a first DU.
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一CU确定所述PDCP SN长度配置信息包括:The method according to claim 41, wherein the determining, by the first CU, the PDCP SN length configuration information comprises:
    所述第一CU生成所述PDCP SN长度配置信息,或者,Generating, by the first CU, the PDCP SN length configuration information, or
    所述第一CU为主节点中的CU,所述第一CU从辅节点接收所述PDCP SN长度配置信息,或者,The first CU is a CU in a master node, and the first CU receives the PDCP SN length configuration information from a secondary node, or
    所述第一CU为辅节点中的CU,所述第一CU从主节点接收所述PDCP SN长度配置信息。The first CU is a CU in a secondary node, and the first CU receives the PDCP SN length configuration information from a primary node.
  43. 根据权利要求41或者42所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 41 or 42, further comprising:
    从所述第一DU接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。Receiving first configuration information from the first DU, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  44. 根据权利要求41-43任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一CU确定所述PDCP SN长度变更时,向所述第一DU发送所述PDCP SN长度配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 41-43, wherein when the first CU determines that the PDCP SN length is changed, it sends the PDCP SN length configuration information to the first DU.
  45. 根据权利要求43或者44所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和 增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 43 or 44, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity includes release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the bearer identifier corresponds to Added configuration information for RLC entities.
  46. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    主节点的CU从辅节点接收第一PDCP SN长度信息,所述第一PDCP SN长度信息用于指示第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度;The CU of the master node receives the first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node, where the first PDCP SN length information is used to indicate the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer;
    所述主节点的所述CU获取所述第一PDCP SN长度。The CU of the master node obtains the first PDCP SN length.
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法,其特征在于,所述主节点的所述CU获取所述第一PDCP SN长度包括:The method according to claim 46, wherein the obtaining of the first PDCP SN length by the CU of the master node comprises:
    所述主节点的所述CU根据所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,读取所述第一PDCP SN长度。The CU of the master node reads the first PDCP SN length according to the first PDCP SN length information.
  48. 根据权利要求46或者47所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 46 or 47, further comprising:
    所述主节点的所述CU从所述辅节点接收所述第一承载的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息;The CU of the master node receives first configuration information of the first bearer from the secondary node, and the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity of the first bearer;
    所述主节点的所述CU通过所述主节点的DU向终端发送所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息。The CU of the master node sends the first configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal through a DU of the master node.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 48, wherein the first configuration information further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer.
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 49, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity comprises release configuration information of an RLC entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and RLC corresponding to the bearer identifier Added configuration information for the entity.
  51. 根据权利要求48-50任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 48 to 50, wherein the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  52. 根据权利要求46-51任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 46-51, wherein the method further comprises:
    在接收所述第一PDCP SN长度信息之前,所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度;Before receiving the first PDCP SN length information, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length;
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述主节点的所述CU向所述主节点的DU发送所述第二PDCP SN长度;When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the CU of the master node sends the second PDCP SN length to the DU of the master node;
    所述主节点的所述CU从所述主节点的所述DU接收所述第一承载的第二配置信息,所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息包括所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息;The CU of the master node receives second configuration information of the first bearer from the DU of the master node, and the second configuration information of the first bearer includes an RLC entity of the first bearer Release and added configuration information;
    所述主节点的所述CU通过所述主节点的所述DU向终端发送所述第二配置信息。The CU of the master node sends the second configuration information to a terminal through the DU of the master node.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 52, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity of the first bearer includes the release configuration information of the RLC entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the bearer Identifies the added configuration information of the corresponding RLC entity.
  54. 根据权利要求52或者53所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述主节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 52 or 53, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the master node, and the method Also includes:
    所述主节点的所述CU生成所述第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长 度信息用于指示所述第二PDCP SN长度;The CU of the master node generates the second PDCP SN length information, and the second PDCP SN length information is used to indicate the second PDCP SN length;
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    所述主节点的所述CU向所述辅节点发送所述第二PDCP SN长度信息。The CU of the master node sends the second PDCP SN length information to the secondary node.
  55. 根据权利要求52或者53所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述辅节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 52 or 53, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer ends at the secondary node, and the method Also includes:
    所述主节点的所述CU从所述辅节点接收第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度。The CU of the master node receives second PDCP SN length information from the secondary node, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length.
  56. 根据权利要求46-55任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述主节点的所述CU从所述辅节点接收第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 46-55, wherein the CU of the primary node receives first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node, comprising:
    所述主节点的所述CU通过辅节点增加请求响应消息、辅节点修改请求响应消息或者辅节点修改申请消息从所述辅节点接收所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。The CU of the primary node receives the first PDCP SN length information from the secondary node through a secondary node addition request response message, a secondary node modification request response message, or a secondary node modification request message.
  57. 一种双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in dual connectivity, characterized in that the method includes:
    辅节点的CU生成第一分组数据汇聚协议PDCP序列号SN长度信息;The CU of the secondary node generates the first packet data convergence protocol PDCP sequence number SN length information;
    所述辅节点的所述CU向主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,所述第一PDCP SN长度信息用于向所述主节点指示第一承载的第一PDCP SN长度。The CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the master node, and the first PDCP SN length information is used to indicate to the master node the first PDCP SN length of the first bearer.
  58. 根据权利要求57所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 57, wherein:
    在生成所述第一PDCP SN长度信息之前,所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第二PDCP SN长度,所述方法还包括:Before generating the first PDCP SN length information, the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, and the method further includes:
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述辅节点的所述CU生成所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息;When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the CU of the secondary node generates release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer;
    所述辅节点的所述CU向所述主节点发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一承载的PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The CU of the secondary node sends first configuration information to the primary node, where the first configuration information includes release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity of the first bearer.
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 58, wherein the first configuration information further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer, and the method further comprises:
    所述辅节点的所述CU向所述辅节点的DU发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息;The CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the secondary node's DU;
    所述辅节点的所述CU从所述辅节点的所述DU接收所述第一承载的无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The CU of the secondary node receives release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity of the first bearer from the DU of the secondary node.
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其特征在于,所述RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的RLC实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的RLC实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 59, wherein the release and added configuration information of the RLC entity includes configuration information of release of an RLC entity corresponding to a bearer identifier of the first bearer and RLC corresponding to the bearer identifier Added configuration information for the entity.
  61. 根据权利要求58-60任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息包括所述第一承载的承载标识对应的PDCP实体的释放的配置信息和所述承载标识对应的PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 58 to 60, wherein the release and added configuration information of the PDCP entity includes the release configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identifier of the first bearer and the Added configuration information of the PDCP entity corresponding to the bearer identification.
  62. 根据权利要求58-61任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于辅节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 58 to 61, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer terminates at a secondary node, and the The method also includes:
    所述辅节点的所述CU生成第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信 息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度;The CU of the secondary node generates second PDCP SN length information, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length;
    所述辅节点的所述CU向主节点发送所述第二PDCP SN长度信息。The CU of the secondary node sends the second PDCP SN length information to the primary node.
  63. 根据权利要求58-61任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于所述主节点,所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 58-61, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the second PDCP SN length, the first bearer terminates at the master node, The method includes:
    所述辅节点的所述CU从所述主节点接收第二PDCP SN长度信息,所述第二PDCP SN长度信息指示所述第二PDCP SN长度。The CU of the secondary node receives second PDCP SN length information from the master node, and the second PDCP SN length information indicates the second PDCP SN length.
  64. 根据权利要求58-63任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅节点的所述CU向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 58 to 63, wherein the CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node, including:
    当所述第一PDCP SN长度不同于所述第二PDCP SN长度时,所述辅节点的所述CU向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。When the length of the first PDCP SN is different from the length of the second PDCP SN, the CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the master node.
  65. 根据权利要求57-63任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅节点的所述CU向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 57 to 63, wherein the CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node, including:
    所述辅节点的所述CU通过辅节点增加请求响应消息、辅节点修改请求响应消息或者辅节点修改申请消息向所述主节点发送所述第一PDCP SN长度信息。The CU of the secondary node sends the first PDCP SN length information to the primary node through a secondary node addition request response message, a secondary node modification request response message, or a secondary node modification request message.
  66. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求37至40任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor being used to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory, The communication device is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 37 to 40.
  67. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求41至65任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor being used to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory, The communication device is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 41 to 65.
  68. 一种装置,所述装置用于执行权利要求37-40任一项所述的方法。A device for performing the method according to any one of claims 37-40.
  69. 一种装置,所述装置用于执行权利要求41-65任一项所述的方法。A device for performing the method according to any one of claims 41-65.
  70. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机软件指令,当所述计算机软件指令被执行时实现权利要求37-65任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium is used for storing computer software instructions, and when the computer software instructions are executed, the method according to any one of claims 37-65 is implemented.
  71. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机执行指令,当所述计算机执行指令被执行时实现权利要求37-65任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product comprises computer-executable instructions, and when the computer-executable instructions are executed, the method according to any one of claims 37-65 is implemented.
  72. 一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括权利要求66和68中任一项所述的装置,以及权利要求67和69中任一项所述的装置。A communication system comprising the device according to any one of claims 66 and 68 and the device according to any one of claims 67 and 69.
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的通信系统,所述通信系统还包括权利要求29和32中任一项所述的装置。The communication system according to claim 72, further comprising the device according to any one of claims 29 and 32.
  74. 一种多制式双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in a multi-system dual connection is characterized in that the method includes:
    生成第一承载的第二分组数据汇聚协议PDCP序列号SN长度配置信息,所述第一承载的所述第二PDCP SN长度配置信息用于指示所述第一承载的第二PDCP SN长度;Generating the second packet data convergence protocol PDCP sequence number SN length configuration information of the first bearer, and the second PDCP SN length configuration information of the first bearer is used to indicate the second PDCP SN length of the first bearer;
    当所述第一承载的所述第二PDCP SN长度不同于所述第一承载的第一PDCP SN 长度时,生成所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化指示;When the length of the second PDCP SN of the first bearer is different from the length of the first PDCP SN of the first bearer, generating a PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer;
    向主节点MN发送所述第一承载的所述PDCP SN长度变化指示;Sending the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer to the master node MN;
    其中,所述第一PDCP SN长度为所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为所述第二PDCP SN长度之前的PDCP SN长度。The first PDCP SN length is the PDCP SN length of the first bearer and the PDCP SN length before the second PDCP SN length.
  75. 根据权利要求74所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度为第一PDCP SN长度时,所述第一承载终结于辅节点SN。The method according to claim 74, wherein when the PDCP SN length of the first bearer is the length of the first PDCP SN, the first bearer terminates at a secondary node SN.
  76. 根据权利要求74所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 74, further comprising:
    生成所述第一承载的第一配置信息;Generating first configuration information of the first bearer;
    向MN发送所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息;Sending the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN;
    所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息还包括无线链路层控制协议RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 76, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer further comprises release and added configuration information of a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity.
  78. 根据权利要求74所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 74, wherein:
    在生成所述第一承载的所述第二PDCP SN长度配置之前,所述第一承载终结于MN;Before generating the second PDCP SN length configuration of the first bearer, the first bearer ends at the MN;
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    从MN接收第一PDCP SN长度配置信息,所述第一PDCP SN长度配置信息用于指示所述第一PDCP SN长度。Receiving first PDCP SN length configuration information from the MN, where the first PDCP SN length configuration information is used to indicate the first PDCP SN length.
  79. 根据权利要求78所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 78, further comprising:
    生成所述第一承载的第一配置信息;Generating first configuration information of the first bearer;
    向MN发送所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息;Sending the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN;
    所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  80. 根据权利要求78所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 78, further comprising:
    生成所述第一承载的第一配置信息;Generating first configuration information of the first bearer;
    向MN发送所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息;Sending the first configuration information of the first bearer to the MN;
    所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的删除和增加的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer includes deletion and addition configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  81. 根据权利要求79或者80所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 79 or 80, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  82. 一种多制式双连接中的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method in a multi-system dual connection is characterized in that the method includes:
    从辅节点SN接收第一承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP序列号SN长度变化指示。Receive a packet data convergence protocol PDCP sequence number SN length change indication from the secondary node SN.
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,所述第一承载终结于SN。The method according to claim 82, wherein before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the first bearer ends at the SN.
  84. 根据权利要求83所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 83, further comprising:
    从SN接收第一承载的SN配置信息;Receiving the SN configuration information of the first bearer from the SN;
    向终端发送所述第一承载的所述SN配置信息。Sending the SN configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal.
    其中,所述第一承载的第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  85. 根据权利要求84所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的所述第一配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 84, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  86. 根据权利要求83-85任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 83-85, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述第一承载的所述PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成所述第一承载的第二配置信息;Generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer;
    向终端发送所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息;Sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal;
    所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  87. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前,所述第一承载终结于主节点MN;The method according to claim 82, wherein before the PDCP SN length of the first bearer changes, the first bearer terminates at the master node MN;
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    向SN发送所述第一承载的PDCP SN长度变化前的PDCP SN长度。Sending the PDCP SN length before the PDCP SN length change of the first bearer to the SN.
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 87, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer includes added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  89. 根据权利要求87所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的第一配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 87, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of a PDCP entity.
  90. 根据权利要求88或者89所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的第一配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 88 or 89, wherein the first configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  91. 根据权利要求87-90任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 87-90, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述第一承载的所述PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成所述第一承载的第二配置信息;Generating the second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer;
    向终端发送所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息;Sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal;
    所述第一承载的第二配置信息包括PDCP实体的释放的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer includes configuration information of release of a PDCP entity.
  92. 根据权利要求87-90任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 87-90, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述第一承载的所述PDCP SN长度变化指示,生成所述第一承载的第二配置 信息;Generating second configuration information of the first bearer according to the PDCP SN length change indication of the first bearer;
    向终端发送所述第一承载的所述第二配置信息;Sending the second configuration information of the first bearer to a terminal;
    所述第一承载的第二配置信息包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The second configuration information of the first bearer includes release and added configuration information of the RLC entity.
  93. 根据权利要求91所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一承载的第二配置信息还包括RLC实体的释放和增加的配置信息。The method according to claim 91, wherein the second configuration information of the first bearer further includes release and added configuration information of an RLC entity.
  94. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得通信装置执行权利要求74至81任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a memory and a processor, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of claims 74 to 81 Methods.
  95. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得通信装置执行权利要求82至83任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a memory and a processor, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of claims 82 to 83 Methods.
  96. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,存储有程序,其特征在于,所述程序用于实现如权利要求74至93任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by storing a program, wherein the program is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 74 to 93.
PCT/CN2019/092442 2018-06-22 2019-06-23 Communication method and communication device in multi-rat dual connectivity WO2019242773A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BR112020026368-0A BR112020026368A2 (en) 2018-06-22 2019-06-23 COMMUNICATION METHOD IN DOUBLE MULTI-RAT CONNECTIVITY, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICES, COMPUTER STORAGE MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
EP23192120.6A EP4297528A3 (en) 2018-06-22 2019-06-23 Communication methods and communication devices in multi-rat dual connectivity
EP19823604.4A EP3806534B1 (en) 2018-06-22 2019-06-23 Communication methods and communication devices in multi-rat dual connectivity
US17/129,460 US11895722B2 (en) 2018-06-22 2020-12-21 Communication method in multi-rat dual connectivity and communications apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810653785 2018-06-22
CN201810653785.0 2018-06-22
CN201811302962.7A CN110636640B (en) 2018-06-22 2018-11-02 Communication method and communication device in multi-system double connection
CN201811302962.7 2018-11-02

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/129,460 Continuation US11895722B2 (en) 2018-06-22 2020-12-21 Communication method in multi-rat dual connectivity and communications apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019242773A1 true WO2019242773A1 (en) 2019-12-26

Family

ID=68762296

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/092442 WO2019242773A1 (en) 2018-06-22 2019-06-23 Communication method and communication device in multi-rat dual connectivity

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110557783B (en)
WO (1) WO2019242773A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103533586A (en) * 2012-07-03 2014-01-22 电信科学技术研究院 Method and apparatus for signaling interaction and layer reconstruction in switching process
CN104488308A (en) * 2012-05-21 2015-04-01 三星电子株式会社 Method and device for transmitting and receiving data in mobile communication system
US20170034866A1 (en) * 2014-01-31 2017-02-02 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method Between Two eNBs to Agree on Radio Resource Configuration for a UE Which Supports Dual Connectivity Between the eNBs
CN107342849A (en) * 2017-06-15 2017-11-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of method and apparatus for carrying out data processing

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2594026A4 (en) * 2010-07-12 2017-08-02 LG Electronics Inc. Data transmission method, related base station and user equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104488308A (en) * 2012-05-21 2015-04-01 三星电子株式会社 Method and device for transmitting and receiving data in mobile communication system
CN103533586A (en) * 2012-07-03 2014-01-22 电信科学技术研究院 Method and apparatus for signaling interaction and layer reconstruction in switching process
US20170034866A1 (en) * 2014-01-31 2017-02-02 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method Between Two eNBs to Agree on Radio Resource Configuration for a UE Which Supports Dual Connectivity Between the eNBs
CN107342849A (en) * 2017-06-15 2017-11-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of method and apparatus for carrying out data processing

Non-Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"E-RABs To Be Modified Item'' (''E-RABs To Be Modified Item'') in an ''SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST", 3GPP TS 36.423
"E-RABs To Be Modified Item'' in an ''SGNB MODIFICATION REQUEST", 3GPP TS 36.423
"SCG Configuration Query", 3GPP TS 36.423
"SGNB ADDITION REQUEST", 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT, 3GPP) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION, TS) 36.423
3GPP TS 36.331
3GPP TS 38.331
See also references of EP3806534A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110557783B (en) 2020-12-04
CN110557783A (en) 2019-12-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7175977B2 (en) Methods, Devices and Systems for Improving Service Reliability
US11546823B2 (en) Network configuration method and apparatus and system
US11553379B2 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting data synchronization for 4G/5G dual-registered mobile communication terminal
WO2020073678A1 (en) Vehicle communication method, device, computer readable medium and electronic device
US20100233960A1 (en) Service discovery functionality utilizing personal area network protocols
WO2020001562A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
JP2019525629A (en) QoS parameter processing method and device in switching scenario
JP2010530675A (en) Data transmission method, data reception method, and apparatus
EP3806534B1 (en) Communication methods and communication devices in multi-rat dual connectivity
WO2019029642A1 (en) Communication method, base station, terminal device and system
KR101749851B1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of protocol adaptation layer (pal) communication to indicate transitioning a device to a default state
WO2019024114A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device and network device
WO2022170948A1 (en) Method for implementing communication continuity and related device
WO2024067797A1 (en) Information transmission method, first communication node, second communication node, and storage medium
WO2019242773A1 (en) Communication method and communication device in multi-rat dual connectivity
EP4140191A1 (en) Secondary f1-c interface for integrated access and backhaul (iab) node
WO2018036421A1 (en) Network access method, access device and terminal device
WO2018219168A1 (en) User equipment data communication method and equipment
CN111586711B (en) Communication method and communication device in multi-air-interface connection
WO2022021251A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
CN111225423B (en) Method and device for forwarding data
WO2019096117A1 (en) Message sending method and device, policy sending method and device, storage medium, and processor
WO2020147617A1 (en) Data forwarding method and device
US20230362848A1 (en) Method and a system for design of signaling radio bearer and handling control plane data transmission and reception
WO2021047514A1 (en) Session management method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19823604

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112020026368

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019823604

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210105

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112020026368

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20201222